FORD MONDEO Owner's Manual - Free Ford Radio Code · FORD MONDEO Owner's Manual. The information...

FORD MONDEO Owner's Manual

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest ofcontinuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any timewithout notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in aretrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.Errors and omissions excepted.© Ford Motor Company 2012

All rights reserved.Part Number: CG3536en 04/2012 20120207134432

IntroductionAbout This Manual...........................................7Symbols Glossary.............................................7Replacement Parts

Recommendation.........................................7

At a GlanceAt a Glance.........................................................11

Child SafetyChild Seats........................................................22Booster Seats..................................................23Child Seat Positioning..................................24ISOFIX Anchor Points....................................27Child Safety Locks.........................................28

Occupant protectionPrinciple of Operation..................................30Fastening the seat belts...............................32Seat belt height adjustment......................32Seat belt reminder.........................................33Using seat belts during pregnancy..........33Disabling the passenger airbag................33

Keys and Remote ControlsGeneral Information on Radio

Frequencies..................................................35Programming the remote control............35Changing the remote control

battery............................................................35

LocksLocking and Unlocking.................................38Global Opening and Closing.....................40Keyless Entry.....................................................41

Engine immobiliserPrinciple of Operation..................................45Coded keys.......................................................45Arming the engine immobiliser................45

Disarming the engine immobiliser...........45

AlarmPrinciple of Operation..................................46Arming the alarm...........................................48Disarming the alarm.....................................48

Steering WheelAdjusting the Steering Wheel...................49Audio Control..................................................49

Wipers and WashersWindscreen Wipers........................................51Autowipers.........................................................51Windscreen Washers....................................52Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........52Headlamp Washers.......................................52Checking the Wiper Blades........................52Changing the Wiper Blades........................53

LightingLighting Control..............................................55Daytime Running Lamps............................56Autolamps........................................................56Automatic Main Beam Control.................56Front Fog Lamps.............................................57Rear Fog Lamps.............................................58Adjusting the Headlamps - Vehicles

With: Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps...................................................58

Headlamp Levelling......................................58Adaptive Headlamps....................................59Hazard Warning Flashers...........................60Direction Indicators........................................61Interior Lamps..................................................61Removing a Headlamp................................63Changing a Bulb.............................................64Bulb Specification Chart.............................70

1

Table of Contents

Windows and MirrorsPower Windows..............................................72Exterior Mirrors................................................74Electric exterior mirrors................................74Auto-Dimming Mirror....................................75Blind Spot Monitor.........................................76

Instrument ClusterGauges................................................................79Warning Lamps and Indicators..................81Audible Warnings and Indicators.............83

Information DisplaysGeneral Information.....................................85Trip Computer.................................................94Personalised Settings..................................96Information Messages.................................98

Climate ControlPrinciple of Operation................................108Air Vents..........................................................108Manual Climate Control............................109Automatic Climate Control.........................111Heated Windows and Mirrors...................113Auxiliary Heater..............................................114Electric sunroof..............................................118

SeatsSitting in the Correct Position...................121Manual Seats..................................................121Power Seats....................................................122Head Restraints.............................................124Rear Seats.......................................................124Heated Seats..................................................125Ventilated Seats............................................126

Convenience featuresSun Shades.....................................................127Instrument Lighting Dimmer....................127

Clock..................................................................127Cigar Lighter....................................................127Ashtray.............................................................128Auxiliary Power Points................................128Cup Holders....................................................129Glove Box.........................................................129Storage compartments..............................129Map Pockets..................................................130Memory Function.........................................130Glasses Holder................................................131CD changer.......................................................131Auxiliary Input Socket..................................131USB Port............................................................131Floor Mats........................................................132

Starting and Stopping theEngine

General Information....................................133Ignition Switch...............................................133Keyless Starting.............................................133Steering Wheel Lock...................................135Starting a Petrol Engine.............................136Starting a Petrol Engine - E85..................137Starting a Diesel Engine.............................137Diesel Particulate Filter..............................138Switching Off the Engine...........................138Engine Block Heater....................................138

Start-StopPrinciple of Operation................................140Using start-stop...........................................140

Eco ModePrinciple of Operation.................................142Using Eco mode............................................142

Fuel and RefuellingSafety Precautions.......................................143Fuel Quality - Petrol....................................143

2

Table of Contents

Fuel Quality - E85........................................143Fuel Quality - Diesel....................................143Catalytic Converter......................................144Fuel filler flap.................................................144Refuelling........................................................146Refuelling - E85............................................146Fuel Consumption.......................................146Technical Specifications...........................146

TransmissionManual Transmission...................................151Automatic Transmission.............................151

BrakesPrinciple of Operation.................................154Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock

Brakes...........................................................154Parking Brake.................................................154

Stability ControlPrinciple of Operation.................................155Using Stability Control................................155

Hill Start AssistPrinciple of Operation.................................156Using hill start assist...................................156

Active suspensionPrinciple of Operation.................................159Using active suspension............................159

Parking AidsPrinciple of Operation................................160Parking Aid......................................................160

Rear view cameraPrinciple of Operation.................................162Rear View Camera........................................162

Cruise ControlPrinciple of Operation.................................165Using Cruise Control....................................165

Adaptive cruise control(ACC)

Principle of Operation.................................167Using Adaptive Cruise Control................168Forward alert function................................172

Speed LimiterPrinciple of Operation.................................173Using the speed limiter...............................173

Driver AlertPrinciple of Operation.................................175Using driver alert...........................................175

Lane Departure WarningPrinciple of Operation..................................177Using lane departure warning..................177

Load CarryingGeneral Information....................................179Luggage Anchor Points..............................179Sliding Loadspace Floor............................180Rear Under Floor Storage..........................182Luggage Covers.............................................182Cargo Nets......................................................183Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................184Dog Guard.......................................................184Load Retaining Fixtures.............................186

TowingTowing a Trailer.............................................188Tow Ball...........................................................188

Driving HintsRunning-In.......................................................192

3

Table of Contents

General Driving Points - Vehicles With:Sports Suspension..................................192

Cold Weather Precautions........................192Driving Through Water................................192

Roadside EmergenciesFirst Aid Kit......................................................193Warning Triangle...........................................193

FusesFuse Box Locations.....................................194Changing a Fuse...........................................195Fuse Specification Chart...........................196

Vehicle recoveryTowing Points...............................................206Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......206

MaintenanceGeneral Information...................................208Opening and Closing the Bonnet..........208Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L

Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)..............210Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L EcoBoost

SCTi (Sigma)..............................................211Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L

Duratec-HE (MI4).....................................212Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost

SCTi (MI4)...................................................213Under Bonnet Overview - 2.3L

Duratec-HE (MI4)....................................214Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L

Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel...................215Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L

Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel.................216Under Bonnet Overview - 2.2L

Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel.................218Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16V

Ti-VCT (Sigma)........................................219Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi

(Sigma)........................................................219

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4).............219

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi(MI4).............................................................219

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi(DV) Diesel/2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel/2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel...........................................................220

Engine Oil Check..........................................220Engine Coolant Check...............................220Brake and Clutch Fluid Check..................221Power Steering Fluid Check......................221Washer Fluid Check.....................................222Technical Specifications...........................222

Vehicle CareCleaning the Exterior..................................225Cleaning the Interior...................................226Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............226

Vehicle batteryJump-Starting the Vehicle........................227Changing the Vehicle Battery.................228Battery connection points........................228

Wheels and TyresGeneral Information...................................229Changing a Road Wheel...........................229Temporary Mobility Kit..............................234Tyre Care.........................................................238Using Winter Tyres......................................238Using Snow Chains.....................................239Tyre Pressure Monitoring System..........239Technical Specifications..........................240

Vehicle identificationVehicle Identification Plate......................244Vehicle Identification Number................245

4

Table of Contents

Capacities and Specific-ations

Technical Specifications...........................246

Audio introductionImportant audio information..................250

Audio unit overviewAudio unit overview......................................251

Audio System SecuritySecurity code................................................254Lost security code.......................................254Entering a security code............................254Incorrect security code..............................254

Audio Unit Clock and DateDisplays

Setting the clock and date on the audiounit................................................................255

Audio unit operationOn/off control...............................................256Bass/treble control.....................................256Balance/fade control.................................256Audio menu control....................................256Station preset buttons..............................258Waveband button.......................................258Autostore control........................................258Traffic information control.......................259Station tuning control...............................260

Audio unit menusAutomatic volume control.......................262Digital signal processing (DSP).............262Audio distortion reduction (CLIP).........262Alternative frequencies.............................263Regional mode (REG)................................263News broadcasts.........................................264

Compact Disc PlayerLoading compact discs.............................265Track selection.............................................265Loading the compact disc changer......265Unloading the compact disc

changer.......................................................266Compact disc playback............................266Fast forward/reverse..................................266Shuffle/random...........................................266Compact disc track compression..........267Compact disc track scanning..................267Ejecting compact discs..............................267Repeat compact disc tracks...................268MP3 file playback........................................268MP3 display options...................................269Ending compact disc playback..............269

Auxiliary input (AUX IN)socket

Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket..............270

Audio TroubleshootingAudio troubleshooting................................271

TelephoneGeneral Information....................................272Telephone setup...........................................272Bluetooth setup............................................273Telephone controls......................................273Using the telephone - Vehicles Without:

Navigation System..................................274Using the telephone - Vehicles With:

Navigation System..................................276

Voice controlPrinciple of Operation................................279Using voice control......................................279Audio unit commands...............................280Telephone commands..............................289Navigation system commands..............294

5

Table of Contents

Climate control commands....................294

ConnectivityGeneral Information...................................297Connecting an external device...............298Connecting an external device - Vehicles

With: Bluetooth.......................................298Using a USB device....................................299Using an iPod.................................................301

AppendicesType approvals.............................................305Type approvals.............................................305Type approvals.............................................305Type approvals............................................306Electromagnetic compatibility...............307

6

Table of Contents

ABOUT THIS MANUALThank you for choosing Ford. Werecommend that you take some time toget to know your vehicle by reading thismanual. The more that you know about it,the greater the safety and pleasure youwill get from driving it.

WARNINGAlways drive with due care andattention when using and operatingthe controls and features on your

vehicle.

Note: This manual describes productfeatures and options available throughoutthe range, sometimes even before they aregenerally available. It may describe optionsnot fitted to your vehicle.Note: Some of the illustrations in thismanual may be used for different models,so may appear different to your vehicle.However, the essential information in theillustrations is always correct.Note: Always use and operate your vehiclein line with all applicable laws andregulations.Note: Pass on this manual when sellingyour vehicle. It is an integral part of thevehicle.This vehicle has received the endorsementof TÜV, the accredited international testingorganisation, for its allergy-friendlyproperties.All materials used in the manufacture ofthe interior of this vehicle meet strictrequirements of the TÜV TOXPROOFCriteria Catalogue for Vehicle Interiors byTÜV Produkt and Umwelt GmbH and aredesigned to minimize the risk of allergicreactions.

Additionally an efficient pollen filterprotects the passengers against allergenparticles in the outdoor air.For more information, contact TÜV atwww.tuv.com.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARYSymbols in this handbook

WARNINGYou risk death or serious injury toyourself and others if you do notfollow the instructions highlighted

by the warning symbol.

CAUTIONYou risk damaging your vehicle if youdo not follow the instructionshighlighted by the caution symbol.

Symbols on your vehicle

When you see these symbols, read andfollow the relevant instructions in thishandbook before touching or attemptingadjustment of any kind.

REPLACEMENT PARTSRECOMMENDATIONNow you can be sure that your Fordparts are Ford partsYour Ford has been built to the higheststandards using high quality Ford OriginalParts. As a result, you can enjoy driving itfor many years.

7

Introduction

Should the unexpected occur and a majorpart needs replacing, we recommend thatyou accept nothing less than Ford OriginalParts.The use of Ford Original Parts ensures thatyour vehicle is repaired to its pre-accidentcondition and maintains its maximumresidual value.Ford Original Parts match Ford's stringentsafety requirements and high standardsof fit, finish and reliability. Quite simply,they represent the best overall repair value,including parts and labour costs.Now it is easier to tell if you have reallybeen given Ford Original Parts. The Fordlogo is clearly visible on the following partsif they are Ford Original Parts. If yourvehicle has to be repaired, look for theclearly visible Ford branding and make surethat only Ford Original Parts have beenused.

Look for the Ford logo on thefollowing partsSheet metal• Bonnet• Doors• Luggage compartment lid or tailgate• Wing

E131722

Bumper and radiator grille• Radiator grille• Front and rear bumper

8

Introduction

E131723

Exterior mirror

E131724

Glass• Rear window• Side glass• Windscreen

E88507

9

Introduction

Lighting• Rear lamps• Headlamp

E131725

10

Introduction

Instrument panel overview - left-hand drive

E87719

A J K L M NC DB H IGFE

P OV U T S R Q

11

At a Glance

Instrument panel overview - right-hand drive

E87720

ED F G B AML H CI

O QU T S R VP

N J K

Lighting controls. See Lighting Control (page 55).AAir vents. See Air Vents (page 108).BDirection indicators. See Direction Indicators (page 61). Telephone controlbuttons. See Telephone controls (page 273). Voice control buttons. See Usingvoice control (page 279). Lane departure warning control buttons. See LaneDeparture Warning (page 177).

C

Audio controls. See Audio Control (page 49).DInstrument cluster. See Gauges (page 79).EInformation display controls. See Information Displays (page 85).FWiper lever. See Windscreen Wipers (page 51).GStart button. See Keyless Starting (page 133).HAudio unit. See Audio unit overview (page 251).INavigation unit. See separate handbook.I

12

At a Glance

Stability control (ESP) switch. See Using Stability Control (page 155).Start-stop switch. See Using start-stop (page 140).

J

Parking aid switch. See Parking Aid (page 160).KHazard warning flasher switch. See Hazard Warning Flashers (page 60).LPassenger airbag deactivation warning lamp. See Disabling the passengerairbag (page 33).

M

Heated windscreen and heated rear window switches. See Heated Windowsand Mirrors (page 113).

N

Climate controls. See Manual Climate Control (page 109). See AutomaticClimate Control (page 111).

O

Cigar lighter. See Cigar Lighter (page 127).PIgnition switch. See Ignition Switch (page 133).QCruise control and speed limiter switches. See Using Cruise Control (page165). Adaptive cruise control switches. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control(page 168). Speed limiter switches. See Using the speed limiter (page 173).

R

Steering wheel adjustment lever. See Adjusting the Steering Wheel (page49).

S

Horn.TCruise control and speed limiter switches. See Using Cruise Control (page165). Adaptive cruise control switches. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control(page 168). Speed limiter switches. See Using the speed limiter (page 173).

U

Driver knee airbag. See Principle of Operation (page 30).V

13

At a Glance

Electric child safety locks

E124779

See Child Safety Locks (page 28).

Keyless entry

E78276

Passive locking and unlocking requires avalid passive key to be located within oneof the three external detection ranges.

Unlocking the vehicle

E78278

Pull a door handle to unlock all the doorsand the luggage compartment lid anddisarm the alarm.

Locking the vehicle

E87384

E87435

See Keyless Entry (page 41).

14

At a Glance

Adjusting the steering wheelWARNING

Never adjust the steering wheelwhen the vehicle is moving.

1

2

2

E95178

3E95179

See Adjusting the Steering Wheel(page 49).

Autowipers

E70315

BA

C

High sensitivityAOnBLow sensitivityC

Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensorusing the rotary control.

See Autowipers (page 51).

Changing the wiper bladesCAUTION

You can use the service position inwinter to provide easier access to thewiper blades for freeing them from

snow and ice. The windscreen wipers willreturn to their normal position as soon asyou switch on the ignition so make surethat the outside of the windscreen is freefrom snow and ice before you switch onthe ignition.

15

At a Glance

E85833

AE75188

Switch off the ignition and move the wiperlever to position A within three seconds.Release the lever when the windscreenwipers have moved to the service position.

See Changing the Wiper Blades (page53).

Autolamps

E70719

The headlamps will come on and go offautomatically depending on the ambientlight.

See Lighting Control (page 55).

Automatic main beam controlWARNING

The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention. A manual

override may be necessary if the systemfails to switch the main beam on or off.

The system will automatically switch onmain beam if it is dark enough and no othertraffic is present. If it detects anapproaching vehicle’s headlamps or taillamps, or street lighting ahead the systemwill switch off main beam before it candistract other road users. Dipped beamswill remain on.

See Automatic Main Beam Control(page 56).

Electric windowsNote: To reduce wind noise or buffetingwhen just one window is open, open theopposite window slightly.

See Power Windows (page 72).

16

At a Glance

Electric folding mirrors

E72623

See Electric exterior mirrors (page 74).

Reverse mirror dippingDepending on the selected mirror position,the relevant exterior mirror will dipwhenever you select reverse gear, givingyou a view of the kerb.When you first use this feature, the mirrorswill dip to a preset position. You canprogramme the degree of dipping.

See Electric exterior mirrors (page 74).

Blind spot information system(BLIS)

WARNINGDo not use the system as areplacement for using the side andrear view mirrors, and looking over

your shoulder before changing lanes. Thesystem is not a replacement for carefuldriving and is only to be used as an aid.

The system displays a yellow indicatorlocated in the exterior mirrors.

E124736

See Blind Spot Monitor (page 76).

Information displays

E70499

Use the arrow buttons to navigate throughthe menus and press OK to make aselection.

See Information Displays (page 85).

Manual climate controlCooling the interior quickly

E71381

17

At a Glance

Heating the interior quickly

E71377

Recommended settings for cooling

E131534

Open the centre and side air vents.Direct the centre air vents upwards and theside air vents toward the side windows.

Recommended settings for heating

E131535

Close the centre air vents and open theside air vents.Direct the side air vents toward the sidewindows.

Defrosting and demisting thewindscreen

E71382

See Manual Climate Control (page 109).

Automatic climate control

E91391

See Automatic Climate Control (page111).

Engine idle speed after startingThe engine may idle at a higher speed thannormal immediately after starting fromcold.

See Starting and Stopping the Engine(page 133).

Keyless starting

E85766

Press the start button.

18

At a Glance

Stopping the engine when the vehicleis moving

WARNINGSwitching off the engine when thevehicle is still moving will result in aloss of brake and steering assistance.

The steering will not be locked, but highereffort will be required. When the ignition isswitched off some electrical circuits,warning lamps and indicators may also beOFF.

Press and hold the start button for twoseconds, or press three times within threeseconds.

See Keyless Starting (page 133).

Diesel particulate filter (DPF)WARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The DPF

regeneration process creates very highexhaust gas temperatures and the exhaustwill radiate a considerable amount of heatduring and after DPF regeneration, andafter you have switched the engine off.This is a potential fire hazard.

See Diesel Particulate Filter (page 138).

Fuel filler flap

E86613

Press the flap to open it. Open the flap fullyuntil it engages.

E139202

A

Insert the fuel nozzle up to and includingthe first notch on the nozzle A. Keep itresting on the cover of the fuel pipeopening.

WARNINGWe recommend that you remove thefuel nozzle slowly to allow anyresidual fuel to drain into the fuel

tank. Alternatively you can wait 10 secondsbefore removing the fuel nozzle.

19

At a Glance

E119081

Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to remove it.

See Fuel filler flap (page 144).

Manual transmissionSelecting reverse gear

E99067

On some vehicles it is necessary to raisethe collar whilst selecting reverse gear.

See Manual Transmission (page 151).

Automatic transmissionNote: Do not press the brake pedal whenremoving the key from the ignition switch.

Selector lever positions

WARNINGApply the brakes before moving theselector lever and keep them applieduntil you are ready to move off.

E80836

S

ParkPReverseRNeutralNDriveDManual shifting and sport modeS

See Automatic Transmission (page151).

Rear view cameraWARNING

The camera does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

The camera is a visual aid for use whenreversing.

20

At a Glance

E99105

See Rear view camera (page 162).

Speed limiterThe system allows you to set a speed, towhich the vehicle then becomes limited.

See Speed Limiter (page 173).

Driver alertWARNING

The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

The system calculates an alertness scorewhich can be displayed on the informationdisplay. If the system detects that you arebecoming drowsy or there is deteriorationin your driving style then warnings will beissued.

See Driver Alert (page 175).

Lane departure warningWARNING


Activate the system using the switches onthe indicator stalk.

E131360

A

B

System onASystem offB

See Lane Departure Warning (page 177).

Towing the vehicle on four wheelsCAUTION

For certain engine and transmissioncombinations, it is recommended notto tow the vehicle with the drive

wheels on the ground.

See Towing the Vehicle on FourWheels (page 206).

21

At a Glance

CHILD SEATS

E133140

E68916

WARNINGSSecure children that are less than150 centimetres (59 inches) tall in asuitable, approved child restraint, in

the rear seat.Extreme Hazard! Do not use arearward facing child restraint on aseat protected by an air bag in front

of it!Read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when you are fitting achild restraint.Do not modify child restraints in anyway.Do not hold a child on your lap whenthe vehicle is moving.

WARNINGSDo not leave unattended children inyour vehicle.If your vehicle has been involved inan accident, have the child restraintschecked by properly trained

technicians.

Note: Mandatory use of child restraintsvaries from country to country.Only child restraints certified toECE-R44.03 (or later) have been testedand approved for use in your vehicle. Achoice of these are available from yourDealer.

Child restraints for different massgroupsUse the correct child restraint as follows:

Baby safety seat

E68918

Secure children that weigh less than 13kilograms (29 pounds) in a rearward facingbaby safety seat (Group 0+) in the rearseat.

22

Child Safety

Child safety seat

E68920

Secure children that weigh between 13 and18 kilograms (29 and 40 pounds) in a childsafety seat (Group 1) in the rear seat.

BOOSTER SEATS

WARNINGSDo not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with only the lapstrap of the seat belt.Do not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with a seat belt thatis slack or twisted.Do not put the seat belt under yourchild’s arm or behind its back.Do not use pillows, books or towelsto boost your child’s height.Make sure that your children sit in anupright position.Secure children that weigh morethan 15 kilograms (33 pounds) butare less than 150 centimetres (59

inches) tall in a booster seat or a boostercushion.

CAUTIONWhen using a child seat on a rear seat,make sure that the child seat reststightly against the vehicle seat. It may

be necessary to lift or remove the headrestraint. See Head Restraints (page 124).

Booster seat (Group 2)

E70710

We recommend that you use a boosterseat that combines a cushion with abackrest instead of a booster cushion only.The raised seating position will allow youto position the shoulder strap of the adultseat belt over the centre of your child’sshoulder and the lap strap tightly acrossits hips.

23

Child Safety

Booster cushion (Group 3)

E68924

CHILD SEAT POSITIONING

WARNINGSPlease consult your Dealer for thelatest details relating to Fordrecommended child seats.

WARNINGSOriginal text according to ECER94.01: Extreme Hazard! Do not usea rearward facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an air bag in front ofit!

When using a child restraint with asupport leg on a second row seat,make sure the support leg rests

securely on the floor.When using a forward facing childseat on a second row seat, alwaysremove the head restraint from that

seat. See Head Restraints (page 124).When using a child seat with a seatbelt, make sure that the seat belt isnot slack or twisted.

Note: When using a child seat on a frontseat, always adjust the front passenger seatto its fully rearwards position. If it provesdifficult to tighten the lap section of the seatbelt without slack remaining, adjust theseatback to the fully upright position andraise the height of the seat. See Seats(page 121).

24

Child Safety

Mass group categories

Seating positions 3210+0

22 - 36 kg15 - 25 kg9 - 18 kgUp to 13 kgUp to 10 kg

UF¹UF¹UF¹XXFront passenger seatwith airbag ON

U¹U¹U¹U¹U¹Front passenger seatwith airbag OFF

UUUUURear seats

X Not suitable for children in this mass group.U Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group.U¹ Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group. However,we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child seat, in the rearseat.UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child seats approved for use in thismass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approvedchild seat, in the rear seat.

ISOFIX child seats


Seating positions10+

Forward facingRear facing

9 - 18 kgUp to 13 kg

Not ISOFIX equippedSize classFront seat

Seat type

A, B, B1, C, D*C, D, E*Size classRear outboard seat ISOFIX

IL, IUF***IL**Seat type

25

Child Safety


Seating positions10+

Forward facingRear facing

9 - 18 kgUp to 13 kg

Not ISOFIX equippedSize classRear centre seat

Seat type

IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraints systems of the semi-universal category.Please consult child restraints systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists.IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child restraints systems of universal categoryapproved for use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class.*The ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal child restraints systemsis defined by the capital letters A to G. These identification letters are displayed on ISOFIXchild restraints.**At time of publishing the recommended Group O+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the BritaxRomer Baby Safe. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Fordrecommended child seats.***At time of publishing the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax RomerDuo. Please consult your Dealer for the latest details relating to Ford recommended childseats.

26

Child Safety

ISOFIX ANCHOR POINTS

WARNINGUse an anti-rotation device whenusing the ISOFIX system. Werecommend the use of a top tether

or support leg.

Your vehicle is fitted with ISOFIX anchorpoints that accommodate universallyapproved ISOFIX child restraints.The ISOFIX system comprises two rigidattachment arms on the child restraint thatattach to anchor points on the outboardrear seats, where the cushion and backrestmeet. Tether anchor points are fittedbehind the outboard rear seats for childrestraints with a top tether.

Top tether anchor points

E87146

E93616

E93514

Attaching a child seat with toptethers

WARNINGDo not attach a tether strap toanything other than the correcttether anchor point.

Note: Where applicable, remove theluggage cover to ease installation. SeeLuggage Covers (page 182).Note: On 4-door vehicles, make sure thetether strap tightening mechanism remainsaccessible when the seatback is fullyengaged.

27

Child Safety

E87591

1. Place the child seat on the back seatcushion and fold the relevant seatbackforwards. See Rear Seats (page 124).

2. Remove the head restraint. See HeadRestraints (page 124).

WARNINGMake sure the top tether strap is notslack or twisted and is properlylocated on the anchor point.

3. Route the tether strap to the anchorpoint.

WARNINGMake sure that the seatback issecure and fully engaged in thecatch.

4. Push the seatback to the uprightposition.

E87145

5. Push the child seat back firmly toengage the ISOFIX lower anchor points.

6. Tighten the tether strap in line with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS

WARNINGYou cannot open the doors frominside if you have put the child safetylocks on.

Manual child safety locksNote: On vehicles with keyless entry, usethe spare key. See Keyless Entry (page41).

28

Child Safety

E78298

Left-hand sideTurn anti-clockwise to lock and clockwiseto unlock.

Right-hand sideTurn clockwise to lock and anti-clockwiseto unlock.

Electric child safety locksNote: Pressing the switch will also disablethe rear electric window switches.

E124779

29

Child Safety

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONAirbags

WARNINGSDo not modify the front of yourvehicle in any way. This couldadversely affect deployment of the

airbags.Original text according to ECER94.01: Extreme Hazard! Do not usea rearward facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!Wear a seat belt and keep sufficientdistance between yourself and thesteering wheel. Only when you use

the seat belt properly, can it hold you in aposition that allows the airbag to achieveits optimum effect. See Sitting in theCorrect Position (page 121).

Have repairs to the steering wheel,steering column, seats, airbags andseat belts carried out by a properly

trained technician.Keep the areas in front of the airbagsfree from obstruction. Do not affixanything to or over the airbag covers.Do not poke sharp objects into areaswhere airbags are fitted. This coulddamage and adversely affect

deployment of the airbags.Use seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby a properly trained technician.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see acloud of harmless powdery residue if anairbag deploys. This is normal.Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a dampcloth.

Driver and front passenger airbags

E74302

The driver and front passenger airbags willdeploy during significant frontal collisionsor collisions that are up to 30 degrees fromthe left or the right. The airbags will inflatewithin a few thousandths of a second anddeflate on contact with the occupants,thus cushioning forward body movement.During minor frontal collisions, overturns,rear collisions and side collisions, the driverand front passenger airbags will notdeploy.

Driver knee airbag

CAUTIONDo not attempt to open the driverknee airbag cover.

The driver knee airbag will deploy duringfrontal collisions or collisions that are upto 30 degrees from the left or the right. Theairbag will inflate within a few thousandthsof a second and deflate on contact withthe occupants, thus providing a cushionbetween the driver’s knees and the steeringcolumn. During overturns, rear collisionsand side collisions, the knee airbag will notdeploy.For item location: See At a Glance (page11).

30

Occupant protection

Note: The knee airbag has a lowerdeployment threshold than the frontairbags. During a minor collision, it ispossible that only the knee airbag deploys.

Side airbags

E72658

Side airbags are fitted inside the seatbackof the front seats. A label indicates thatside airbags are fitted to your vehicle.The side airbags will deploy duringsignificant lateral collisions. The airbagswill inflate within a few thousandths of asecond and deflate on contact with theoccupants, thus providing protection forthe chest and shoulder areas. During minorlateral collisions, overturns, front collisionsand rear collisions, the side airbags will notdeploy.

Curtain airbags

E75004

Curtain airbags are fitted inside the trimpanels over the front and rear sidewindows. Moulded badges in the B-pillartrim panels indicate that curtain airbagsare fitted to your vehicle.The curtain airbags will deploy duringsignificant lateral collisions. The airbag willinflate within a few thousandths of asecond and deflate on contact with theoccupants, thus providing protection forthe head. During minor lateral collisions,front collisions, rear collisions, or overturnsthe curtain airbags will not deploy.

Seat beltsWARNINGS

Wear a seat belt and keep sufficientdistance between yourself and thesteering wheel. Only when you use

the seat belt properly, can it hold you in aposition to achieve its optimum effect. SeeSitting in the Correct Position (page121).

Never use a seat belt for more thanone person.Use the correct buckle for each seatbelt.Do not use a seat belt that is slackor twisted.Do not wear thick clothing. The seatbelt must fit tightly around your bodyto achieve its optimum effect.Position the shoulder strap of theseat belt over the centre of yourshoulder and position the lap strap

tightly across your hips.

31

Occupant protection

The driver and front passenger seat beltretractors are fitted with a seat beltpretensioner. Seat belt pretensioners havea lower deployment threshold than theairbags. During minor collisions, it ispossible that only the seat beltpretensioners will deploy.

Status after a collision

WARNINGSeat belts subjected to strain, as aresult of an accident, should berenewed and the anchorages

checked by a properly trained technician.

FASTENING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNINGInsert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear a distinct click. You havenot fastened the seat belt properly

if you do not hear a click.

E74124

E85817

Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if youpull it sharply or if the vehicle is on a slope.Press the red button on the buckle torelease the belt. Let it retract completelyand smoothly.

SEAT BELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT

E87511

Note: Lifting the slider slightly whilepressing the locking button makes it easierto release the locking mechanism.To raise or lower, press the locking buttonon the adjuster and move as necessary.

32

Occupant protection

SEAT BELT REMINDER

WARNINGThe occupant protection system willonly provide optimum protectionwhen you use the seat belt properly.

The seat belt reminder warninglamp illuminates and an audiblewarning will sound if the driver's

or front seat passenger's seat belt has notbeen fastened and the vehicle exceeds arelatively low speed. It will also illuminateif the driver's or front seat passenger's seatbelt is unfastened when the vehicle ismoving. The audible warning and warninglamp will go off after seven minutes.

Deactivating the seat beltreminderSee your dealer.

USING SEAT BELTS DURINGPREGNANCY

E68587

WARNINGPosition the seat belt correctly foryour safety and that of your unbornchild. Do not use only the lap strap

or the shoulder strap.

Position the lap strap comfortably acrossyour hips and low beneath your pregnantabdomen. Position the shoulder strapbetween your breasts, above and to theside of your pregnant abdomen.

DISABLING THE PASSENGERAIRBAG

WARNINGMake sure that the passenger airbagis disabled when using a rearwardfacing child restraint on the front

passenger seat.

E71313

Fitting the passenger airbagdeactivation switch

WARNINGIf you need to fit a child restraint ona seat protected by an operationalairbag in front of it, have a passenger

airbag deactivation switch fitted. Ask yourdealer for further information.

Note: The key switch is located in the glovecompartment with an airbag deactivationlamp in the instrument panel.

33

Occupant protection

If the airbag warning lamp illuminates orflashes when you are driving, this indicatesa malfunction. See Warning Lamps andIndicators (page 81). Remove the childrestraint and have the system checkedimmediately.

Disabling the passenger airbag

A BE71312

DisabledAEnabledB

Turn the switch to position A.When you switch the ignition on, check thatthe passenger airbag deactivation warninglamp illuminates.

Enabling the passenger airbagWARNING

Make sure that the passenger airbagis enabled when you are not using achild restraint on the front passenger

seat.

Turn the switch to position B.

34

Occupant protection

GENERAL INFORMATION ONRADIO FREQUENCIES

CAUTIONSThe radio frequency used by yourremote control can also be used byother short distance radio

transmissions (e.g. amateur radios,medical equipment, wireless headphones,remote controls and alarm systems). If thefrequencies are jammed, you will not beable to use your remote control. You canlock and unlock the doors with the key.

Check your vehicle is locked beforeleaving it unattended. This willsafeguard against any potential

malicious frequency blocking.

Note: You could unlock the doors if youpress the buttons on the remote controlunintentionally.The operating range between your remotecontrol and your vehicle varies dependingon the environment.

PROGRAMMING THE REMOTECONTROLYou can programme a maximum of eightremote controls to use with your vehicle(including any supplied with your vehicle).

Programming a new remotecontrol1. Insert the key in the ignition.2. Cycle the key from position 0 to II and

then back to 0 four times within sixseconds.

3. Leave the key in position 0 and pressany button on the remote controlwithin 10 seconds. You will receiveconfirmation via a chime or LED thatprogramming has been successful.

Note: Further remote controls may beprogrammed at this stage.4. Press any button on each additional

remote control within 10 seconds ofeach other.

Reprogramming the unlockingfunctionNote: When you press the unlock buttoneither all the doors are unlocked or only thedriver’s door is unlocked. Pressing the unlockbutton again unlocks all the doors.Press and hold the unlock and lock buttonson the remote key simultaneously for atleast four seconds with the ignition off. Thedirection indicators will flash twice toconfirm the change.To return to the original unlocking function,repeat the process.

CHANGING THE REMOTECONTROL BATTERY

E107998

Make sure that you dispose ofold batteries in anenvironmentally friendly way.

Seek advice from your local authorityregarding recycling.

Remote control with a folding keyblade

E1288092

1

35

Keys and Remote Controls

1. Insert a screwdriver in the positionshown and gently push the clip.

2. Press the clip down to release thebattery cover.

E128810

3. Carefully remove the cover.

E128811

4. Turn the remote control over to removethe battery.

5. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) withthe + facing upwards.

6. Replace the battery cover.

Remote control without a foldingkey blade

1

2

1

E87964

1. Press and hold the pushbuttons on theedges to release the cover. Carefullyremove the cover.

2. Remove the key blade.

E105362

3

3. Twist a flat bladed screwdriver in theposition shown to separate the twohalves of the remote control.

E119190

4

36


4. Carefully insert the screwdriver in theposition shown to open the remotecontrol.

E125860

5

CAUTIONDo not touch the battery contacts orthe printed circuit board with thescrewdriver.

5. Carefully prise out the battery with thescrewdriver.

6. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) withthe + facing downwards.

7. Assemble the two halves of the remotecontrol.

8. Install the key blade.

37


LOCKING AND UNLOCKING

CAUTIONCheck your vehicle is locked beforeleaving it unattended.

Central lockingYou can only centrally lock the doors if theyare all closed.Note: The driver’s door can be unlockedwith the key. This needs to be used if theremote control or keyless entry is notfunctioning.Note: Central locking also locks andunlocks the fuel filler flap.

Double lockingWARNING

Do not activate double locking whenpersons or animals are inside thevehicle. You will not be able to

unlock the doors from the inside if you havedouble locked them.

E71961

Double locking is a theft protection featurethat prevents someone from opening thedoors from the inside. You can only doublelock the doors if they are all closed.

Locking and unlockingconfirmationWhen you unlock the doors, the directionindicators will flash once.When you lock the doors, the directionindicators will flash twice.

Locking and unlocking the doorswith the key

B

E71962

A

B

A

UnlockALockB

Double locking the doors with thekeyTurn the key to the lock position twicewithin three seconds to double lock thedoors.

38

Locks

Locking and unlocking the doorsand the luggage compartment lidwith the remote control

E87379

A B C

UnlockALockBLuggage compartment lid unlock(press twice)

C

Locking the doors and the luggagecompartment lid with the remotecontrolPress button B once.

Double locking the doors and theluggage compartment lid with theremote controlPress button B twice within three seconds.

Locking and unlocking the doorsfrom insideDriver's door

A

B

E71958

Lock all doorsAUnlock all doorsB

Front and rear passenger doors

E98653

To lock the front and rear passenger doorsindividually, press the button and close thedoor when leaving the vehicle.

39

Locks

Luggage compartment lidOpening the luggage compartment lidwith the remote controlPress button C on the remote control twicewithin three seconds.

Closing the luggage compartment lid4-door

E89131

5-door

E89132

Estate

E89133

A recessed grip is incorporated inside theluggage compartment lid to facilitateclosing.

Automatic relockingThe doors will relock automatically if youdo not open a door within 45 seconds ofunlocking the doors with the remotecontrol. The door locks and the alarm willreturn to their previous state.

Reprogramming the unlockingfunctionThe unlocking function may bereprogrammed so that only the driver’sdoor is unlocked. See Programming theremote control (page 35).

GLOBAL OPENING ANDCLOSINGYou can also operate the electric windowswith the ignition off via the global openingand global closing function.Note: Global closing will only operate if youhave set the memory correctly for eachwindow. See Power Windows (page 72).

40

Locks

Global opening

E71955

To open all the windows, press and holdthe unlock button for at least threeseconds. Press either the lock or theunlock button again to stop the openingfunction.

Global closingVehicles without keyless entry

WARNINGTake care when using global closing.In an emergency, press a buttonimmediately to stop.

E71956

To close all the windows, press and holdthe lock button for at least three seconds.Press any button again to stop the closingfunction. The anti-trap function is alsoactive during global closing.

Vehicles with keyless entry

E87384

WARNINGTake care when using global closing.In an emergency, press the buttonon the driver’s door handle to stop.

Note: Global closing can be activated usingthe button on the driver’s door handle.Global opening and closing can also beactivated using the buttons on the passivekey.To close all the windows, press and holdthe button on the driver’s door handle forat least two seconds. The anti-trapfunction is also active during global closing.

KEYLESS ENTRYGeneral information

WARNINGThe keyless entry system may notfunction if the key is close to metalobjects or electronic devices such as

mobile phones.

41

Locks

Note: If the door handles are pulledrepeatedly during a short period of timewithout the presence of a valid passive key,the system will become inoperable for 30seconds.The passive entry system will not functionif:• The passive key frequencies are

jammed.• The passive key battery is flat.Note: If the passive entry system does notfunction, you will need to use the key bladeto lock and unlock your vehicle.The keyless system allows the driver tooperate the vehicle without the use of akey or remote control.

E78276

Passive locking and unlocking requires avalid passive key to be located within oneof the three external detection ranges.These are located approximately one anda half metres from the driver and frontpassenger door handles and the luggagecompartment lid.

Passive keyThe vehicle can be locked and unlockedwith the passive key. The passive key canalso be used as a remote control. SeeLocking and Unlocking (page 38).

Locking the vehicleWARNING

The vehicle does not lock itselfautomatically. If no locking button ispressed, the vehicle will remain

unlocked.

Note: The ignition will automatically switchoff when you lock your vehicle from theoutside. This is to prevent the vehicle batteryfrom discharging.Note: If locking from the luggagecompartment lid, the passive key must bewithin the luggage compartment liddetection range.

E87384

E87435

Locking buttons are located on each of thefront doors and the luggage compartmentlid.

42

Locks

To activate central locking and arm thealarm:• Press a locking button once.To activate double locking, to arm thealarm and the interior sensors:• Press a locking button twice within

three seconds.Note: Once activated, the vehicle willremain locked for approximately threeseconds. This is to allow you to pull a doorhandle and check if the vehicle is locked.When the delay period is over, the doors canbe opened again, provided the passive keyis within the respective detection range.

Luggage compartment lidNote: The luggage compartment lid cannotbe closed and will pop back up if the passivekey is located inside the luggagecompartment.Note: If a second valid passive key islocated within the luggage compartmentlid detection range, the luggagecompartment lid can be closed.

Unlocking the vehicleNote: If the vehicle remains locked forlonger than five days, the system will enteran energy-saving mode. This is to reducethe discharge of the vehicle battery. Whenthe vehicle is unlocked while in this mode,the reaction time of the system may be alittle longer than normal. Unlocking thevehicle once will deactivate theenergy-saving mode.

E78278

Pull one of the door handles or the luggagecompartment lid handle.Note: A valid passive key must be locatedwithin the detection range of that door.One long flash of the direction indicatorsconfirms that all the doors, the luggagecompartment lid and the fuel filler flaphave been unlocked and that the alarmhas been disarmed.

Unlocking only the driver's doorIf the unlocking function is reprogrammedso that only the driver’s door is unlocked (See Keys and Remote Controls (page35). ), note the following:If the driver’s door is the first door which isopened, the other doors and the luggagecompartment lid will remain locked. Doorscan be unlocked individually by pulling theinterior door handles on those doors.If the front passenger door or one of therear doors is the first door which is opened,all the doors and the luggagecompartment lid will be unlocked.

Disabled keysAny keys left inside the vehicle interiorwhen it is locked will be disabled.A disabled key cannot be used to turn theignition on or start the engine.In order to use these passive keys again,they have to be enabled.

43

Locks

To enable all your passive keys, unlock thevehicle using a passive key or the remotecontrol unlocking function.All passive keys will then be enabled if theignition is turned on or the vehicle is startedusing a valid key.

Locking and unlocking the doorswith the key blade

1

2

1

E87964

1. Carefully remove the cover.2. Remove the key blade and insert it into

the lock.

44

Locks

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe engine immobiliser is a theft protectionsystem that prevents someone fromstarting the engine with an incorrectlycoded key.

CODED KEYSNote: Do not shield your keys with metalobjects. This may prevent the receiver fromrecognising your key as a valid one.Note: Have all of your remaining keyserased and recoded if you lose a key. Askyour dealer for further information. Havereplacement keys recoded together withyour existing keys.If you lose a key, you can obtain areplacement from your Ford Dealer. Ifpossible, provide them with the keynumber from the tag provided with theoriginal keys. You can also obtainadditional keys from your Ford Dealer.

ARMING THE ENGINEIMMOBILISERThe engine immobiliser is armedautomatically a short time after you haveswitched the ignition off.

DISARMING THE ENGINEIMMOBILISERThe engine immobiliser is disarmedautomatically when you switch the ignitionon with a correctly coded key.If the message Immobiliser activeappears in the information display, yourkey has not been recognised. Remove thekey and try again.

If you are unable to start the engine with acorrectly coded key, this indicates amalfunction. The message Immobiliseractive will appear in the informationdisplay when you switch on the ignition.Have the immobiliser checkedimmediately.

45

Engine immobiliser

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONAlarm systemYour vehicle may be equipped with one ofthe following alarm systems:• Perimeter alarm.• Perimeter alarm with interior sensors.• Category one alarm with interior

sensors and battery back-up sounder.• Category one alarm with interior

sensors, battery back-up sounder andtilt sensors.

Perimeter alarmThe perimeter alarm is a deterrent againstunauthorised access to your vehiclethrough the doors and the bonnet. It alsoprotects the audio unit.

Interior sensorsVehicles without overhead console

E71401

Vehicles with overhead console

E131656

WARNINGThe sensors must not be covered up.Do not activate the alarm with fullguard if any persons, animals or other

moving objects are inside the vehicle.

The sensors act as a deterrent againstunauthorised intrusion by sensing anymovement within the vehicle.

Battery back-up sounderThe battery back-up sounder is an extraalarm system which will sound a sirenwhen the alarm is triggered. It is armeddirectly when you lock the vehicle. Thesounder has its own battery and will soundan alarm siren even if someonedisconnects the vehicle battery or thebattery back-up sounder itself.

Tilt sensorsThe tilt sensors detect if someoneattempts to steal a wheel or tow thevehicle away by sensing changes in theinclination of the vehicle.Note: When travelling on a ferry with thealarm armed, deactivate the tilt sensors byselecting reduced guard. This will preventthe alarm from being triggered by themovement.

Triggering the alarmOnce armed, the alarm is triggered in anyof the following ways:• If someone opens a door, the tailgate

or the bonnet without a valid key orremote control.

• If someone removes the audio ornavigation system.

• If the ignition is turned to position I, IIor III without a valid key.

• If the interior sensors detect movementwithin the vehicle.

46

Alarm

• On vehicles with a battery back-upsounder, if someone disconnects thevehicle battery or the battery back-upsounder itself.

• If the tilt sensors detect a change in theinclination of the vehicle.

If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn willsound for 30 seconds and the hazardwarning flasher will flash for five minutes.Any further attempts to perform one of theabove will trigger the alarm again.

Full and reduced guardFull guardFull guard is the standard setting.In full guard, the interior and tilt sensorsare activated when you arm the alarm.Note: This may result in false alarms ifanimals or moving objects are inside thevehicle or, on vehicles with tilt sensors, whentravelling on a ferry.Note: False alarms can also be triggeredby the auxiliary heater. See AuxiliaryHeater (page 114). If you are using theauxiliary heater, direct the air flow towardsthe footwell.

Reduced guardIn reduced guard, the interior and tiltsensors are deactivated when you arm thealarm.Note: You can set the alarm to reducedguard for the current ignition cycle only. Thenext time you switch on the ignition, thealarm will be reset to full guard.

Ask on ExitYou can set the information display to askyou each time which level of guard youwish to set.

If you select Ask on Exit, the messageReduced guard? appears in theinstrument cluster display each time youswitch the ignition off.If you wish to arm the alarm with reducedguard, press the OK button when thismessage appears.If you wish to arm the alarm with full guard,leave the vehicle without pressing the OKbutton.

Selecting full or reduced guardNote: Selecting Reduced does not set thealarm permanently to reduced guard. It setsit to reduced guard only for the currentignition cycle. If you regularly set the alarmto reduced guard, select Ask on Exit.

E70499

E74509

Full Guard

Alarm

ReducedAsk on Exit

47

Alarm

1. Press the right arrow button on thesteering wheel to enter the main menu.

2. Highlight Setup with the up and downarrow buttons and press the right arrowbutton.

3. Highlight Alarm and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Reduced or Full guard. Ifyou prefer to be asked each time youswitch off the ignition, select Ask onExit.

5. Press the OK button to confirm theselection.

6. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. To return to the trip computerdisplay directly, hold the left arrowbutton pressed.

Information messagesSee Information Messages (page 98).

ARMING THE ALARMTo arm the alarm, lock the vehicle. SeeLocks (page 38).

DISARMING THE ALARMVehicles without keyless entryPerimeter alarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors with the key and switching theignition on with a correctly coded key, orunlocking the doors or the luggagecompartment lid with the remote control.

Category one alarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors with the key and switching theignition on with a correctly coded keywithin 12 seconds, or unlocking the doorsor the luggage compartment lid with theremote control.

Vehicles with keyless entryNote: A valid passive key must be locatedwithin the detection range of that door forkeyless entry. See Keyless Entry (page 41).

Perimeter alarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors and switching the ignition on, orunlocking the doors or the luggagecompartment lid with the remote control.

Category one alarmDisarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors and switching the ignition onwithin 12 seconds, or unlocking the doorsor the luggage compartment lid with theremote control.

48

Alarm

ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEEL

WARNINGNever adjust the steering wheelwhen the vehicle is moving.

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in thecorrect position. See Sitting in the CorrectPosition (page 121).

1

2

2

E95178

3E95179

WARNINGMake sure that you fully engage thelocking lever when returning it to itsoriginal position.

AUDIO CONTROL

E72288

A

C

BD

E

Volume upASeek upBVolume downCSeek downDModeE

ModePress and hold the mode button to selectthe audio source.Press the mode button to:• tune the radio to the next preset

station• play the next CD• play the other side of a cassette tape• accept an incoming telephone call.• end a telephone call.

49

Steering Wheel

SeekPress a seek button to:• tune the radio to the next station up or

down the frequency band• play the next or the previous CD track• fast forward or rewind the cassette

tape.Press and hold a seek button to:• tune the radio up or down the

frequency band• seek through a CD track.

50

Steering Wheel

WINDSCREEN WIPERS

BC

D

AE70696

Single wipeAIntermittent wipeBNormal wipeCHigh speed wipeD

Intermittent wipe

E70315

BA

C

Short wipe intervalAIntermittent wipeBLong wipe intervalC

AUTOWIPERS

CAUTIONSDo not switch autowipers on in dryweather conditions. The rain sensoris very sensitive and the wipers may

operate if dirt, mist or flies hit thewindscreen.

CAUTIONSReplace the wiper blades as soon asthey begin to leave bands of waterand smears. If you do not replace

them, the rain sensor will continue todetect water on the windscreen and thewipers will operate, even though themajority of the windscreen is dry.

Fully defrost the windscreen in icyconditions before you switchautowipers on.Switch autowipers off before youenter a car wash.

E70315

BA

C

High sensitivityAOnBLow sensitivityC

If you switch autowipers on, the wipers willnot cycle until water is detected on thewindscreen. The rain sensor will thencontinuously measure the amount of wateron the windscreen and adjust the speedof the wipers automatically.Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensorusing the rotary control. With lowsensitivity, the wipers will operate whenthe sensor detects a lot of water on thewindscreen. With high sensitivity, thewipers will operate if the sensor detects asmall amount of water on the windscreen.

51

Wipers and Washers

WINDSCREEN WASHERS

WARNINGDo not operate the windscreenwashers for more than 10 secondsor when the reservoir is empty.

Note: The washer jets are heated when theignition is on.

E70776

REAR WINDOW WIPER ANDWASHERSIntermittent wipe

E70777

Reverse gear wipeThe rear window wiper will operateautomatically when you select reverse gearif the wiper lever is in position B, C or D.

WasherWARNING

Do not operate the rear windowwasher for more than 10 seconds orwhen the reservoir is empty.

E70777

Pull the lever fully towards the steeringwheel and hold it to operate the washer.

HEADLAMP WASHERSThe headlamp washers will operate withthe windscreen washers when theheadlamps are on.Note: To stop the washer fluid reservoiremptying quickly, the headlamp washerswill not operate every time that you use thewindscreen washers.

CHECKING THE WIPERBLADES

E66644

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge ofthe blade to check for roughness.Clean the wiper blade lips with waterapplied with a soft sponge.

52

Wipers and Washers

CHANGING THE WIPERBLADESWindscreen wiper blades

CAUTIONSSet the windscreen wipers in theservice position to change the wiperblades.You can use the service position inwinter to provide easier access to thewiper blades for freeing them from

snow and ice. Make sure that the outsideof the windscreen is free from snow andice before using the wipers.

Service position

E85833

AE75188

Switch off the ignition and move the wiperlever to position A within three seconds.Release the lever when the windscreenwipers have moved to the service position.

Changing the windscreen wiper bladesSet the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition and lift the wiper arms.

E728991

2

1. Press the locking button.2. Remove the wiper blade.Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.3. Install in the reverse order.

Rear window wiper bladesChanging the rear window wiper blades- Estate1. Lift the wiper arm.

2

3

4

E86456

2. Position the wiper blade at right anglesto the wiper arm.

3. Disengage the wiper blade from thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

53

Wipers and Washers

Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.5. Install in the reverse order.

Changing the rear window wiper blades- 5-door1. Lift the wiper arm.

E864572

3

2. Press the locking button.3. Remove the wiper blade.Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place.4. Install in the reverse order.

54

Wipers and Washers

LIGHTING CONTROLLighting control positions

E70718

A B C

OffASide and tail lampsBHeadlampsC

Parking lampsCAUTION

Prolonged use of the parking lampswill discharge the battery.

Switch off the ignition.

Both sidesSet the lighting control to position B.

One side

E75505

A

B

Right-hand sideALeft-hand sideB

Main and dipped beam

E70725

Pull the lever fully towards the steeringwheel to switch between main and dippedbeam.

Headlamp flasherPull the lever slightly towards the steeringwheel.

Home safe lightingSwitch the ignition off and pull thedirection indicator lever towards thesteering wheel to switch the headlampson. You will hear a short tone. Theheadlamps will go off automatically afterthree minutes with any door open, or 30seconds after the last door has beenclosed.

55

Lighting

With all doors closed, but within the 30second delay, opening any door will resultin the three minute timer starting again.The home safe lights can be cancelled byeither pulling the direction indicator levertowards the steering wheel again or byturning the ignition switch on.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPSThe lamps will illuminate when the ignitionis on.

AUTOLAMPS

E70719

Note: If you have switched autolamps on,you can only switch the main beam on whenautolamps has switched the headlamps on.The headlamps will come on and go offautomatically depending on the ambientlight.

AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAMCONTROL

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention. A manual

override may be necessary if the systemfails to switch the main beam on or off.

A manual override may be requiredwhen approaching other road userssuch as cyclists.

WARNINGSDo not use the system in fog.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weather conditionsthe system may not function. Amanual override may be necessary in

these cases.Reflective road signs may be detectedas oncoming traffic and theheadlamps may be switched to

dipped beam.If the lights of oncoming vehicles arehidden by obstacles (for exampleguard rails) the system may not

deactivate the main beam.Always fit Ford Original Parts whenreplacing headlamp bulbs. Otherbulbs may reduce system

performance.Check and replace wiper bladesregularly to ensure the camera sensorhas a clear view through the

windscreen. Replacement wiper bladesmust be the correct length.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings, insectsand snow or ice.The system will automatically switch onmain beam if it is dark enough and no othertraffic is present. If it detects anapproaching vehicle’s headlamps or taillamps, or street lighting ahead the systemwill switch off main beam before it candistract other road users. Dipped beamswill remain on.A camera sensor is centrally mountedbehind the windscreen of the vehicle, andmonitors conditions continuously to decidewhen to switch the main beam off and on.

56

Lighting

Once the system is active the main beamwill switch on if:• It is dark enough to require the use of

main beams and• there is no traffic or street lighting

ahead and• vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h

(25 mph).The main beam will switch off if:• The ambient light is high enough that

main beam is not required.• An approaching vehicle's headlamps

or tail lamps are detected.• Street lighting is detected.• Vehicle speed falls below 25 km/h (16

mph).• The camera sensor is too hot or

becomes blocked.

Activating the systemSwitch on the system using the informationdisplay and autolamps. See InformationDisplays (page 85). See Autolamps(page 56).

E70719

Turn the switch to the autolamps position.Note: The system may take a short time toinitialise after first switching the ignition on,especially in very dark conditions. The mainbeam will not automatically switch onduring this period.

Setting the system sensitivityThe system has three sensitivity levelswhich can be accessed via the informationdisplay. See Information Displays (page85).The sensitivity determines the speed atwhich the main beam will be restored afterdetected traffic leaves the field of view.

Manually overriding the system

E70725

Use the main beam lever to switchbetween main beam and dipped beam.Note: This is a temporary override and thesystem will return to automatic operationafter a short period.To permanently deactivate the system usethe information display menu or turn thelighting control switch from autolamps toheadlamps.

FRONT FOG LAMPS

E70721

WARNINGOnly use the front fog lamps whenvisibility is considerably restricted byfog, snow or rain.

57

Lighting

REAR FOG LAMPS

E70720

WARNINGSOnly use the rear fog lamps whenvisibility is restricted to less than 50metres (164 feet).Do not use the rear fog lamps whenit is raining or snowing and visibilityis more than 50 metres (164 feet).

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS- VEHICLES WITH: ADAPTIVEFRONT LIGHTING/XENONHEADLAMPSTo adjust the headlamps for driving on theleft or right hand side of the road, see yourdealer.

HEADLAMP LEVELLINGNote: Vehicles with Xenon headlamps areequipped with automatic headlamplevelling.

E70722A B

Raised headlamp beamsALowered headlamp beamsB

You can adjust the level of the headlampbeams according to the vehicle load.

Recommended headlamp levelling switch positions

Switch positionLoad in luggagecompartment

Load

Second row seatsFront seats

0--1-2

0 (0.52)--1-2

1 (0.52)-31-2

58

Lighting

Switch positionLoad in luggagecompartment

Load

Second row seatsFront seats

3 (0.52)Max131-2

4 (1.52)Max1-1

1 See Vehicle identification (page 244).2 Vehicles with active suspension.

ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS

E72897

A

B

A

B

without AFSAwith AFSB

The AFS adjusts the headlamp dippedbeam depending on vehicle direction andspeed. It improves visibility when you aredriving at night and helps to reduceheadlamp glare for oncoming drivers.

The system will not operate when thevehicle is stationary, when you haveswitched on the daytime running lamps orwhen you have selected reverse gear.

59

Lighting

A message will appear in the informationdisplay if the system malfunctions. SeeInformation Messages (page 98). Theheadlamps will move to a fixed central ordipped position. Have the system checkedas soon as possible.

Cornering lamps

E72898

B

A

B

A

Headlamp beamACornering lamp beamB

The cornering lamps illuminate the insideof a corner when you are turning.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

E71943

For item location: See At a Glance (page11).

60

Lighting

DIRECTION INDICATORS

E70727

Note: Tap the lever up or down to make thedirection indicators flash only three times.

INTERIOR LAMPSCourtesy lamp

CBA

E71945

OffADoor contactBOnC

If you set the switch to position B, thecourtesy lamp will come on when youunlock or open a door or the luggagecompartment lid. If you leave a door openwith the ignition switch off, the courtesylamp will go off automatically after sometime to prevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch it back on, switchon the ignition for a short time.The courtesy lamp will also come on whenyou switch off the ignition. It will go offautomatically after a short time or whenyou start or restart the engine.If you set the switch to position C with theignition switch off, the courtesy lamp willcome on. It will go off automatically aftera short time to prevent the vehicle batteryfrom discharging. To switch it back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.

Reading lamps

E71946

If you switch off the ignition, the readinglamps will go off automatically after sometime to prevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch them back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.

LED Interior lightingNote: Individual lamps may be switched onindependently, but not off if all lamps havebeen switched on by the driver.Note: All other lamps will be eithernon-switchable or with individual readingor dome lamp functionality only.

61

Lighting

The lamps will come on when you unlockor open a door or the luggagecompartment lid. If you leave a door openwith the ignition switch off, all lamps willgo off automatically after some time toprevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch them back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.

Side mounted lamp

BCE139419

A

Reading lamp on and off switchADoor function switchBAll lamps on and off switchC

If you press switch B all lamps remain offwhen the door is opened. Press the switchagain to reverse.You can control all lamps using switch C.

Centre mounted lamp

E139420CD

A B

Right-hand side reading lamp onand off switch

A

Left-hand side reading lamp onand off switch

B

Door function switchCAll lamps on and off switchD

If you press switch C all lamps remain offwhen the door is opened. Press the switchagain to reverse.You can control all lamps using switch D.

62

Lighting

Vanity mirror lamps

A

B

E72900

OffAOnB

If you switch off the ignition, the vanitymirror lamps will go off automatically aftera short time to prevent the vehicle batteryfrom discharging. To switch them back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.

REMOVING A HEADLAMP

WARNINGHave Xenon bulbs changed by atrained technician. There is a risk ofelectric shock.

1. Open the bonnet. See Opening andClosing the Bonnet (page 208).

E85995

2. Remove the screws.

E88843

3. Remove the plastic screw and retainer.

63

Lighting

5

4E85996

4. Carefully pull the corner of the grilleand bumper towards the front of thevehicle.

5. Carefully lift the corner of theheadlamp and push it as far as possibletowards the back of the vehicle.

7

6

E88982

6. Carefully pull the headlamp towardsthe centre of the vehicle, behind thegrille and bumper, to disengage it fromthe lower outer fixing point.

7. Remove the headlamp.CAUTION

When fitting the headlamp, take carenot to damage the locating points.

Note: When fitting the headlamp, makesure that you fully engage the headlamp inthe lower outer fixing point.Note: When fitting the headlamp, tightenthe front screw first and then the rear screw.

CHANGING A BULB

WARNINGSSwitch the lights and the ignition off.

Let the bulb cool down beforeremoving it.Have Xenon bulbs changed by atrained technician. There is a risk ofelectric shock.

CAUTIONSDo not touch the glass of the bulb.

Only fit bulbs of the correctspecification. See BulbSpecification Chart (page 70).

Note: The following instructions describehow to remove the bulbs. Fit replacementsin the reverse order unless otherwise stated.

HeadlampNote: Remove the covers to gain access tothe bulbs.

Direction indicator1. Remove the headlamp. See

Removing a Headlamp (page 63).

64

Lighting

2

3

E72259

2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwiseand remove it.

3. Gently press the bulb into the bulbholder, turn it anti-clockwise andremove it.

Headlamp main beam1. Remove the headlamp. See


3

2

E72261

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.3. Release the clip and remove the bulb.

Headlamp dipped beam1. Remove the headlamp. See


3

2

E72260


3. Remove the bulb.

Cornering lamp1. Remove the headlamp. See


3

2

E72262

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.3. Release the clip and remove the bulb.

Daytime running lampsNote: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

65

Lighting

E131653

Side repeater

E72263

1. Carefully remove the side repeater.

E72291

2. Remove the bulb holder.

3. Remove the bulb.

Approach lampNote: Position the mirror glass as farinwards as possible.

1

E72264

1. Insert a screwdriver into the gapbetween the mirror housing and themirror glass and release the metalretaining clip.

E72265

2

3

2. Remove the lamp.3. Remove the bulb.

66

Lighting

Front fog lamps

E72267

3

2

4

1

Note: You cannot separate the fog lampbulb from the bulb holder.Note: Do not remove the screws.1. Loosen the screws.2. Remove the lamp.3. Disconnect the electrical connector.4. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise

and remove it.

Rear lampsDirection indicator

E86003

1

1. Remove the trim panel.

E131687


3. Gently press the bulb into the bulbholder, turn it anti-clockwise and removeit.

Tail and brake lampNote: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

67

Lighting

Reversing lamp and fog lamp

1

E86006

1. Remove the trim panel.

E131688


3. Gently press the bulb into the bulbholder, turn it anti-clockwise and removeit.

Central high mounted brake lampNote: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

Number plate lamp

3

2

1

E72789

1. Carefully release the spring clip.2. Remove the lamp.3. Remove the bulb.

Interior lampsVehicles with LED lampsNote: These are not serviceable items,please consult your dealer if they fail.

E131655

68

Lighting

Vehicles without interior sensors

3

2

E72788

1. Carefully prise out the lens.2. Remove the lens.3. Remove the bulb.

Vehicles with interior sensors

2

3

E72787


Reading lampsVehicles without interior sensors

33

2

E72796


Vehicles with interior sensors

22

1

E72786

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.2. Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise

and remove it.

69

Lighting

E739393

3. Remove the bulb.

Vanity mirror lamp

E72785

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.2. Remove the bulb.

Luggage compartment lamp

E72784

1. Carefully prise out the lamp.2. Remove the bulb.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART

Power (watt)SpecificationLamp

21PY21WFront direction indicator

55H1Headlamp main beam

55H7Headlamp dipped beam

55H1Cornering lamp

5W5WSide repeater

5W5WApproach lamp

35H8Front fog lamp

5W5WSide lamp

70

Lighting

Power (watt)SpecificationLamp

21PY21WRear direction indicator

21H21WRear fog lamp

21P21WReversing lamp

5W5WNumber plate lamp

10FestoonInterior lamp

5BA9sReading lamp

5W5WVanity mirror lamp

6W6WLuggage compartment lamp

71

Lighting

POWER WINDOWS

WARNINGDo not operate the electric windowsunless they are free from obstruction.

Note: If you operate the switches oftenduring a short period of time, the systemmight become inoperable for a certain timeto prevent damage due to overheating.Note: You can operate the windows forseveral minutes after you switch off theignition. They will be deactivated as soonas a door is opened.Note: If you operate both the switch on therelevant door and the switch for thatwindow on the driver’s door at the sametime, the window will stop moving.Switch on the ignition to operate theelectric windows.

Global opening and global closingYou can also operate the electric windowswith the ignition off via the global openingand global closing function. See GlobalOpening and Closing (page 40).Note: Global opening and global closingwill open or close the windowsautomatically only on vehicles equippedwith four electric windows.Note: Global closing will only operate if youhave set the memory correctly for eachwindow.

Driver’s door switches

E121510

You can operate all the windows with theswitches on the door trim panel of thedriver’s door.

Front and rear passengers’ doorswitches

E70849

Opening and closing the windowsautomaticallyPress or lift the switch to the second actionpoint and release it. Press or lift it again tostop the windows.

Safety switch for rear windowsWARNING

On some vehicles, pressing theswitch will also lock the rear doorsfrom inside. See Child Safety

Locks (page 28).

Note: You can always operate the rearwindows from the driver’s door.

72

Windows and Mirrors

E121511

A switch in the driver’s door disables therear electric window switches.The light in the switch illuminates and thelights in the rear window switches go offwhen the rear windows are disabled.

Anti-trap functionWARNING

Careless closing of the windows canoverride the protection function andcause injuries.

The electric windows will stopautomatically while closing and reversesome distance if there is an obstacle in theway.

Overriding the anti-trap function

CAUTIONWhile you close the window for thethird time, the anti-trap function isdisabled. Make sure there are no

obstacles in the way of the closing window.

To override this protection function whenthere is a resistance, for example, in thewinter, proceed as follows:1. Close the window twice until it reaches

the resistance and let it reverse.

2. Close the window a third time to theresistance. The anti-trap function isdisabled and you cannot close thewindow automatically. The windowwill override the resistance and you canclose it fully.

3. If the window does not close after thethird attempt, have it checked by aproperly trained technician.

Resetting the memory of theelectric windows

WARNINGThe anti-trap function is deactivateduntil you have reset the memory.

After the battery has been disconnectedfrom the vehicle you must reset thememory separately for each window:1. Lift the switch until the window is fully

closed. Hold the switch lifted for onemore second.

2. Release the switch and lift it again, twoor three times, for one more second.

3. Open the window and try to close itautomatically.

4. Reset and repeat procedure if thewindow does not close automatically.

Safety modeWARNING

The anti-trap function is not activeduring this procedure.

If the system detects a malfunction, itenters a safety mode. The windows willmove for only about 0.5 seconds at a timeand then stop again. Close the windowsby pressing the switch again when thewindows stop moving. Have this checkedimmediately.

73

Windows and Mirrors

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

WARNINGDo not overestimate the distance ofthe objects that you see in theconvex mirror. Objects seen in

convex mirrors will appear smaller andfurther away than they actually are.

Manual folding mirrorsFoldingPush the mirror towards the door windowglass.

UnfoldingMake sure that you fully engage the mirrorin its support when returning it to itsoriginal position.

ELECTRIC EXTERIORMIRRORS

A CBE70846

Left-hand mirrorAOffBRight-hand mirrorC

Mirror tilting positions

E70847

The electric exterior mirrors are fitted witha heating element that will defrost ordemist the mirror glass. See HeatedWindows and Mirrors (page 113).

Electric folding mirrorsAutomatic folding and unfoldingNote: If the mirrors have been folded usingthe manual fold button they can only beunfolded using the manual fold button.The mirrors will fold automatically whenyou lock the vehicle with the key, theremote control or a keyless entry systemrequest. The mirrors will unfold when youunlock the vehicle with the key, the remotecontrol, a keyless entry system request,the driver's interior door handle or startingthe engine.

Manual folding and unfoldingThe electric folding mirrors operate withthe ignition on.Note: You can operate the mirrors (mirrortilting and folding) for several minutes afteryou switch off the ignition. They will bedeactivated as soon as a door is opened.

74

Windows and Mirrors

E72623

Press the button to fold or unfold themirrors.If you press the switch again while themirrors are moving, they will stop andreverse the direction of movement.Note: When the mirrors are operated oftenduring a short period of time, the systemmay become inoperable for a period of timeto prevent damage due to overheating.

Reverse mirror dippingDepending on the switch position (A or C),the relevant exterior mirror will dipwhenever you select reverse gear, givingyou a view of the kerb.Note: You can disable this feature byleaving the switch in position B.The exterior mirror will return to the originalposition:• If the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h

(6 mph).• Approximately 10 seconds after reverse

gear has been disengaged.• If the switch is returned to position B.

When you first use this feature, the mirrorwill dip to a preset position. This positioncan be adjusted using the followingsequence:1. Turn the ignition on. Do not start the

engine.2. Select the desired exterior mirror (A or

C).3. Select reverse gear, the selected

exterior mirror will adjust to a presetposition.

4. Adjust the mirror to the required dippedposition.

5. Disengage reverse gear or press andhold the desired memory pre-setbutton until a single chime sounds toconfirm. See Memory Function (page130).

The settings will be stored automatically.

AUTO-DIMMING MIRROR

E71028

The auto-dimming mirror will adjustautomatically when hit by glaring lightfrom behind. It will not work when you haveselected reverse gear.

75

Windows and Mirrors

BLIND SPOT MONITORBlind spot information system(BLIS)

WARNINGSThe system is not designed toprevent contact with other vehiclesor objects. The system only provides

a warning to assist you in detectingvehicles in the blind spot zones. Thesystem will not detect obstacles,pedestrians, motorcyclists or cyclists.

Do not use the system as areplacement for using the side andrear view mirrors, and looking over

your shoulder before changing lanes. Thesystem is not a replacement for carefuldriving and is only to be used as an aid.

The system is a convenience feature thataids the driver in detecting vehicles thatmay have entered the blind spot zone (A).The detection area is on both sides of thevehicle extending rearwards from theexterior mirrors to approximately 3 metres(10 feet) beyond the bumper. The systemwill alert you if certain vehicles enter theblind spot zone whilst driving.

A

A

E124788

Using the systemThe system displays a yellow indicatorlocated in the exterior mirrors.

E124736

Note: Both indicators will illuminate brieflywhen you switch the ignition on to confirmthat the system is operational.Note: On vehicles with automatictransmission, the system is active only in S,D and N.The system is only active when you exceed10 km/h (6 mph). The system istemporarily deactivated when you selectreverse gear.

System detection and alertsThe system will trigger the alert for vehiclesthat enter the blind spot zone from the rearor merge from the side. Vehicles that youpass, or vehicles that enter the blind spotzone from the front, will only trigger thealert after the vehicle has remained in theblind spot zone for a short period of time.Note: Vehicles that pass through the blindzone quickly (typically less than 2 seconds)will not trigger the alert.The system consists of two radar sensorseach located behind the rear wheelshidden behind the bumpers.

CAUTIONSDo not place items such as bumperstickers in this area.Repairs to these areas using body fillerwill affect the performance of thesystem.

76

Windows and Mirrors

E124741

Detection limitationsThere may be certain instances wherevehicles entering and exiting the blind spotzones may not be detected.Instances which may cause non-detection:• Debris build up on the rear bumper

panels in the area of the sensors.• Certain manoeuvring of vehicles

entering and exiting the blind zone.• Vehicles passing through the blind zone

at high speed.• Severe weather conditions.• Several vehicles passing through the

blind zone following each other closely.

False alertsNote: False alerts are temporary and willself correct.There may be certain instances when thesystem will alert with no vehicle present inthe blind zone.Circumstances where false alerts mayoccur:• Road guardrails.• Motorway concrete walls.• Construction areas.• Sharp turns around a building.• Bushes and trees.

• Cyclists and motorcyclists.• Coming to a stop with a vehicle directly

behind but very close.

Turning the system on and offNote: The on or off position will remain untilmanually changed.You can turn the system on and off usingthe information display. See InformationDisplays (page 85).When you turn the system off no furtheralerts will be received. The BLIS warningindicator will illuminate. See WarningLamps and Indicators (page 81).

Detection errorsNote: The alert indicator in the mirror willnot illuminate.If the system senses a fault on eithersensor, the system warning symbol willilluminate and remain on. The informationdisplay will confirm the fault and indicatewhether the left or right side is affected.

Blocked sensor

WARNINGPrior to the system recognizing ablocked condition and issuing awarning, the number of missed

objects will increase.

CAUTIONThe sensors may not detect vehiclesin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.

Note: Keep the rear bumper areasurrounding the sensors free from dirt, iceand snow.If a sensor becomes blocked the systemperformance may degrade. A blockedsensor message may be displayed.

77

Windows and Mirrors

The system will automatically return tonormal operation once two other vehicleshave been detected on both sides.

Trailer towing false alerts

CAUTIONVehicles fitted with a trailer towmodule not approved by us may notcorrectly be detected. Switch the

system off to avoid false alerts. SeeInformation Displays (page 85).

If the vehicle is fitted with a trailer towmodule approved by us, the system willdetect a connected trailer and deactivate.A confirmation message will be shown inthe information display. See InformationMessages (page 98). The BLIS warningindicator will illuminate. See WarningLamps and Indicators (page 81).

78

Windows and Mirrors

GAUGESType 1 and 2

BA C D

E72984

TachometerAEngine coolant temperature gaugeBFuel gaugeCSpeedometerD

79

Instrument Cluster

Type 3

A B

CDEE130765

TachometerASpeedometerBEngine coolant temperature gaugeCFuel gaugeDMessage centre. See Information Displays (page 85).E

Engine coolant temperature gaugeNote: On type 3 this gauge is shown withinthe message centre and will not bedisplayed unless required. See InformationDisplays (page 85).Shows the temperature of the enginecoolant. At normal operating temperature,the indicator will remain in the centresection.

CAUTIONDo not restart the engine until thecause of overheating has beenresolved.

If the indicator moves towards 120°C, theengine is overheating. Stop the engine,switch the ignition off and determine thecause once the engine has cooled down.See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).

80

Instrument Cluster

Fuel gaugeNote: On type 3 this gauge is shown withinthe message centre.The arrow adjacent to the fuel pumpsymbol tells you on which side of yourvehicle the fuel filler cap is located.

WARNING LAMPS ANDINDICATORSThe following warning lamps andindicators will illuminate briefly when youswitch the ignition on to confirm that thesystem is operational:• ABS• Airbag• Blind spot monitor• Brake system• Coolant temperature• Engine• Frost• Ignition• Oil pressure• Stability control (ESP).If a warning or indicator lamp does notilluminate when the ignition is switchedon, it indicates a malfunction. Have thesystem checked by properly trainedtechnician.

ABS warning lampIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You will continue

to have normal braking (without ABS).Have the system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as possible.

Airbag warning lampIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. Have the system

checked by a properly trained technician.

Blind spot monitor indicator

E124823

It will illuminate when thisfeature is switched off or inconjunction with a message.

See Blind Spot Monitor (page 76). SeeInformation Messages (page 98).

Brake system lampIt illuminates when the parkingbrake is engaged.

WARNINGReduce your speed gradually andstop your vehicle as soon as it is safeto do so. Use your brakes with care.

If it illuminates when you are driving, checkthat the parking brake is not engaged. Ifthe parking brake is not engaged, thisindicates a malfunction. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technicianimmediately.

Coolant temperature warninglamp

CAUTIONDo not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level beingcorrect. Have the system checked by

a properly trained technician immediately.

81

Instrument Cluster

If it stays on after starting orilluminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Stop

your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch the engine off. Check thecoolant level. See Engine Coolant Check(page 220).

Direction indicatorsFlashes during operation. Asudden increase in the rate offlashing warns of a failed

indicator bulb. See Changing a Bulb(page 64).

Engine warning lampIf it illuminates with the enginerunning, this indicates amalfunction. If it flashes when

you are driving, reduce the speed of yourvehicle immediately. If it continues toflash, avoid heavy acceleration ordeceleration. Have the system checked bya properly trained technician immediately.

CAUTIONIf the engine warning lamp illuminatesin conjunction with a message, havethe system checked as soon as

possible.

Forward alert indicator

E124824

It will illuminate when thisfeature is switched off. SeeForward alert function (page

172).

Front fog lamp indicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe front fog lamps on.

Frost warning lampWARNING

Even if the temperature rises toabove 4ºC (39.2°F) there is noguarantee that the road is free of

hazards caused by inclement weather.

It will illuminate and glow orangewhen the outside airtemperature is between 4ºC

(39.2ºF) and 0ºC (32ºF). It will glow redwhen the temperature is below 0ºC(32ºF).

Glow plug indicatorSee Starting a Diesel Engine(page 137).

Headlamp indicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe headlamp dipped beam orthe side and tail lamps on.

Ignition warning lampIf it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. Switch off all

unnecessary electrical equipment. Havethe system checked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately.

Lane departure warning indicatorIt will illuminate when thisfeature is switched off or inconjunction with a message. The

indicator will go out when you switch thesystem back on or when you switch theignition off. See Lane Departure Warning(page 177). See Information Messages(page 98).

82

Instrument Cluster

Low fuel level warning lampIf it illuminates, refuel as soon aspossible.

Main beam indicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe headlamp main beam on. Itwill flash when you use the

headlamp flasher.

Message indicatorIt will illuminate when a newmessage is stored in theinformation display. See

Information Messages (page 98).

Oil pressure warning lampCAUTION

Do not resume your journey if itilluminates despite the level beingcorrect. Have the system checked by

a properly trained technician immediately.

If it stays on after starting orilluminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Stop

your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch the engine off. Check the engineoil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 220).

Rear fog lamp indicatorIt will illuminate when you switchthe rear fog lamps on.

Seat belt reminderSee Seat belt reminder (page33).

Shift indicatorIt will illuminate to inform youthat shifting to a higher gear maygive better fuel economy and

lower CO2 emissions. It will not illuminateduring periods of high acceleration, brakingor when the clutch pedal is pressed.

Stability control (ESP) warninglamp

While driving, it flashes duringactivation of the system. Afterswitching on the ignition, if it

does not illuminate or illuminatescontinuously while driving, this indicates amalfunction. During a malfunction, thesystem switches off. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technicianas soon as possible.

If you switch ESP off, the warning lamp willilluminate. The lamp will go out when youswitch the system back on or when youswitch the ignition off.

Start-stop indicatorIt will illuminate to inform youwhen the engine shuts down orin conjunction with a message.

See Using start-stop (page 140). SeeInformation Messages (page 98).

AUDIBLE WARNINGS ANDINDICATORSSwitching the chimes on and offYou can deactivate certain chimes.To set which chimes should sound:

83

Instrument Cluster

E70499



3. Highlight Chimes and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight the chime and press the OKbutton to switch the chime on and off.

5. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Press and hold the left arrowbutton to return to the main menudisplay.

84

Instrument Cluster

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGDo not operate the informationdisplay controls when the vehicle ismoving.

Note: The information display will remainon for several minutes after you switch offthe ignition.Various systems on your vehicle can becontrolled using the buttons on yoursteering wheel. Corresponding informationis displayed in the information display.For detailed instructions on audio,navigation, phone etc. refer to theappropriate manual.

Controls

E70499

Press the up and down arrow buttons:• to scroll through the trip computer

displays• to scroll through and highlight the

options within a menu.Press the right arrow button:• to enter the main menu from the trip

computer displays• to enter a sub-menu.Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.Hold the left arrow button pressed at anytime to return to the main menu display(escape button).Note: The system will return to the tripcomputer displays automatically if you donot press any button for a period of time.Press the OK button to choose andconfirm a setting.

Instrument cluster functions

Type 3Type 2Type 1Function

XXXTrip computer

XXXInformation messages

XXXClock setup

XX-Display settings

XX-Park heater setup

85

Information Displays

Type 3Type 2Type 1Function

X--Navigation control

X--CD control

X--CD changer control

X--Radio control

X--Phone control

X--Auxiliary input control

Type 1

E80604

Press the up and down arrow buttons onthe steering wheel to scroll through the tripcomputer displays. See Trip Computer(page 94).

86


Menu structure

Information

Reset trip

BLIS

ECO MODE

Trip OdoAvg FuelAvg SpeedAll values

MessagesAuto StartStop

Gear ShiftingAnticipationSpeedFor more Info

Clock Set Clock24 Hour Mode12 Hour ModeE131626

Type 2

E74426

6.3Average Fuel

09:00

234.2 km

123456 km

l100km

Press the up and down arrow buttons onthe steering wheel to scroll through the tripcomputer displays. See Trip Computer(page 94).

87


Menu structure

Reset Trip

BLISESP

Trip OdoAvg fuelAvg speedAll

Gear shiftingAnticipationSpeedFor more Info

EnglishDeutschItalianoFrançaisEspañolTürkçePyccкийNederlandsPolski

PortuguêsSvenska

Configure

Language

Measure unit

Display

Set Clock24 Hour Mode12 Hour Mode

Always offOn guidanceAlways on

Messages

Tyre Press.Auto StartStop

MetricImperial

Help ScreenRadio InfoPhone InfoNAV info

Information

Clock

Setup

ECO MODE

BAE131627

88


Chimes

Forw Alert

Low Fuel

Home lightGeneral warn.General info.

Low

OffHighNormal

Off

ManualAuto

Hill Launch

Check

High loadLow load

Tyre Pressure

Full guard

Ask on exitReduced

Alarm

Aux. Heater

Parkheater

BA

E87753

Set Time

SaturdaySunday

FridayThursday

MondayTuesdayWednesday

Set Time

SaturdaySunday

FridayThursday

MondayTuesdayWednesday

Time 1

Time 2

OnceActive now

89


Type 3

E88048

Use the controls to scroll through the menudisplays.

Device listThe highlighted icon shows the currentmenu in use.

Navigation

CD

CD changer

Radio

Phone

Trip computer

Settings

Auxiliary input

90


Menu structure

CD

Navigation HomeDestinat. mem.Destinat. A-ZLast destinat.Cancel guidan.

DestinationsDestinationsDestinations

Folder / Tracks

Folder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / TracksFolder / Tracks

StationsStationsStationsStationsStationsStationsStations

Numbers

NumbersNumbers

Station listFM 1 / FMFM 2FM 3FM - ASTMW / AMLW / AM-AST

CD changer CD 1CD 2CD 3CD 4CD 5CD 6

Radio

Phone bookRedialIncoming callsOutgoing callsCall status

Phone

AE131628

Trip computer Distance to emptyAverage fuelAverage speedReset selected elementReset trip odometer

91


English

Colour themesConfigure

Language

Measure unit

DisplayDriver alert

Set Clock24-hour mode12-hour mode

Gear shiftingAnticipationSpeedMore info

Always offOn guidanceAlways on

Messages

Tyre PressureCoolant temperature

Driver alertAuto StartStop

MetricImperial

Help ScreenNAV info

Settings

Information

Clock

Setup

ESPBLISECOMODE

A CBE131629

A

DeutschItalianoFrançaisEspañolTürkçePyccкийNederlandsPolski

PortuguêsSvenska

92


Chimes Low Fuel

Home lightGeneral warn.General info.

Forw Alert LowNormalHighOff

Lane depart Sensitivity NormalHigh

Intensity HighNormalLow

Off

ManualAuto

Hill Launch

Check

High loadLow load

Tyre Pressure

Full guard

Ask on exitReduced

Alarm

Aux Heater

Auto beam OnSensitivity High

NormalLow

C

E131630

93


Set Time

SaturdaySunday

WednesdayTuesday

FridayThursday

Monday

Set Time

SaturdaySunday

WednesdayTuesday

FridayThursday

Monday

Time 1

Time 2

OnceActive now

Park heater

Auxiliary input

BA

E88067

TRIP COMPUTEROdometerRegisters the total mileage of the vehicle.

TripmeterRegisters the mileage of individualjourneys.

Distance to emptyIndicates the approximate distance thevehicle will travel on the fuel remaining inthe tank. Changes in driving pattern maycause the value to vary.

Average fuel consumptionIndicates the average fuel consumptionsince the function was last reset.

Average speedIndicates the average speed calculatedsince the function was last reset.

Outside air temperatureShows the outside air temperature.

94


Type 1 and 2

E74428

6.3Average Fuel

10:20

234.2 km

123456 km

l100km

A

B

C

A. Trip computerB. OdometerC. TripmeterThe trip computer includes the followinginformation displays:

Average fuel

Average speed

Outside air

Reset Trip

Dist. to empty

E74441

Press the up and down arrow buttons onthe steering wheel to scroll through the tripcomputer displays.Note: The position of the trip computerdisplay may vary depending on theinformation shown in the display.

Resetting the trip computer using themain menuTo reset a particular display:1. Press the right arrow button on the

steering wheel to enter the main menu.2. Highlight Reset Trip with the up and

down arrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

3. Highlight the function to be reset.4. Press the right arrow button to select

the function.5. Hold the OK button pressed.To reset all three displays, select Allvalues and hold the OK button pressed.

Type 3

E88049A

Trip computerA

Press the OK button on the steering wheelto cycle through the different trip computerdisplays. To reset a value, press and holdthe OK button.

Resetting the trip computer using themain menuTo reset a particular display:1. Highlight Trip Computer with the up

and down arrow buttons and press theright arrow button.

2. Highlight the function to be reset.

95


3. Hold the OK button pressed.

PERSONALISED SETTINGSThe following information is displayed inthe information display if you haveselected it:

Help screen, radio, navigation andphone informationThe help screen appears for a few secondswhen you switch the ignition on.If the radio, navigation or telephone isoperating, information relating to thissystem is displayed in the informationdisplay.To select which information is displayedin the information display:

Type 1 and 21. Press the right arrow button on the

steering wheel to enter the main menu.2. Highlight Setup with the up and down

arrow buttons and press the right arrowbutton.

3. Highlight Display and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Configure and press the rightarrow button.

5. To toggle the Help screen, Radio Infoand Phone Info on and off, highlightthe desired setting and press the OKbutton to confirm the setting.

6. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. Hold the left arrow buttonpressed to return to the trip computerdisplay.

Type 31. Highlight Settings with the up and





5. To toggle the Help screen and NAVInfo on and off, highlight the desiredsetting and press the OK button toconfirm the setting.

Navigation informationYou can also choose when the navigationinformation is displayed in the informationdisplay. Three options are available:• Always off: No navigation information

is displayed in the information display.• On guidance: The navigation

information will only appear when thenavigation system provides a guidanceinstruction. This function is onlyavailable on certain navigationsystems.

• Always on: Navigation information willalways appear in the informationdisplay when the navigation system isoperating.

To set when navigation information shouldbe displayed:






5. Highlight Nav Info and press the rightarrow button.

96


6. Highlight the desired setting and pressthe OK button to confirm the setting.







5. Highlight Nav Info and press the rightarrow button.


LanguageA choice of eleven languages are available:English, German, Italian, French, Spanish,Turkish, Russian, Dutch, Polish, Swedishand Portuguese.





4. Highlight Language and press the rightarrow button.







4. Highlight Language and press the rightarrow button.


Units of measureNote: The outside air temperature is onlydisplayed in degrees Celsius and cannot beset to degrees Fahrenheit.To select metric or imperial units:





4. Highlight Measure Unit and press theright arrow button.


6. Press the left arrow button to return toexit the menu. Hold the left arrowbutton pressed to return to the tripcomputer display.

97






4. Highlight Measure Unit and press theright arrow button.


INFORMATION MESSAGES

E70499

Press OK to acknowledge and removesome messages from the informationdisplay. Other messages will be removedautomatically after a short time.With instrument cluster type 3, certainmessages need to be confirmed beforeyou can access the menus.

Message indicatorThe message indicatorilluminates to supplement somemessages. It will be red or amber

depending on the severity of the messageand will remain on until the cause of themessage has been rectified.

Message symbolsSee Owner’s handbook.

Have the system checked at thenext service.

Have the system checked assoon as possible.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it issafe to do so.

Viewing current messagesType 1 and 21. Press the right arrow button on the

steering wheel to enter the main menu.2. Highlight Information with the up and


3. Highlight Messages and press the rightarrow button.

4. Use the up and down buttons to viewthe current messages.

Type 31. Press the right arrow button on the

steering wheel to enter the main menu.2. Highlight Settings with the up and


3. Highlight Information with the up anddown arrow buttons and press the rightarrow button.

4. Highlight Messages and press the rightarrow button.

5. Use the up and down buttons to viewthe current messages.

98


Active suspension

ActionIndicatorMessage

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician.

amberIVDC malfunction

See Active suspension (page 159).-IVDC comfort

See Active suspension (page 159).-IVDC normal

See Active suspension (page 159).-IVDC sport

Airbag


Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

amberAirbag malfunction

Alarm


See Alarm (page 46).amberAlarm triggered


-Alarm systemservice reqd.

Automatic main beam control, Lane departure warning and Driver alert


Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.redDriver fatigueRest now

The front camera sensor has reduced visibility.Clean the windscreen.

amberFront cameraClean screen

The front camera sensor has malfunctioned.Have this checked as soon as possible.

amberFront cameramalfunction

99



The affected systems are temporarily unavail-able, and should resume after a few minutes.

amberFront cameranot available

Take a rest break soon.amberDriver fatigueRest suggested

The system has malfunctioned. Have thischecked as soon as possible.

amberLane departurewarn. malfunct.

Battery and charging system


Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do soand switch off the ignition. Have the system

checked by a properly trained technician as soonas possible.

redOvervoltage: Stop

safely!


amberLow battery

Blind spot monitor


See Blind Spot Monitor (page 76).amberBLIS sensorblocked

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS right sensor

malfunction

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS left sensor

malfunction

Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberBLIS malfunction

See Blind Spot Monitor (page 76).amberBLIS inactive Trailerattach'd

100


Child power lock


Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.amberChild lock malfunc-

tion

Climate control


See Auxiliary Heater (page 114).amberAux. Heater on

Cruise control and Adaptive cruise control (ACC)



amberACC malfunction

See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page 167).amberClean radar sensor


amberForward Alertmalfunction

See Cruise Control (page 165).-Cruise controlactive

See Cruise Control (page 165).-Cruise controlstandby

See Adaptive cruise control (ACC) (page 167).-ACC unavailable

Doors open


Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close.

redDriver door open


redDriver side rear dooropen


redPassenger dooropen

101




redPassenger side reardoor open


redLuggage comp.open

Vehicle is moving. Stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible and close. See Opening and

Closing the Bonnet (page 208).

redBonnet open

Engine immobiliser


See Engine immobiliser (page 45).amberImmobiliser active

Hill start assist



amberHill Launch notavailable

See Hill Start Assist (page 156).amberPlease use parkbrake !

See Hill Start Assist (page 156).-Hill Launch Assistactive

See Hill Start Assist (page 156).-Hill Launch Assistoff

Keyless system


Have this checked as soon as possible.redSteering malfunc-tion

See Keyless Entry (page 41).amberKey not detected

The engine is still running. Switch the ignition off.See Keyless Starting (page 133).

amberCar operative PressSTOP

102



See Keyless Entry (page 41).amberKey outside car

See Changing the remote control battery(page 35).

amberKey battery low

See Steering Wheel Lock (page 135).-Steering locked -Retry

Lighting



amberFront lightsmalfunction

One or both of the headlamp dipped beam bulbshave blown. Check the headlamp dipped beam

bulbs. See Changing a Bulb (page 64).

-Low beam: Bulbfault

One or both of the rear fog lamp bulbs haveblown. Check the rear fog lamp bulbs. See

Changing a Bulb (page 64).

-Rear fog light: Bulbfault

One or both of the brake lamp bulbs have blown.Check the brake lamp bulbs. See Changing a

Bulb (page 64).

-Stop lamps: Bulbfault

One or both of the brake lamp bulbs on yourtrailer have blown. Check the brake lamp bulbs

on your trailer.

-Trailer stopl.: Bulbfault

One or both of the direction indicator bulbs onyour trailer have blown. Check the direction

indicator bulbs on your trailer.

-Trailer turnl.: Bulbfault

103


Maintenance



redEngine malfunction

See Engine Oil Check (page 220).amberCheck engine oillevel


amberWater detected infuel

See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).-Low washer fluidlevel


-Service oil

Occupant protection



-Crash mode

Parking brake


See Parking Brake (page 154).redPark brake applied

See Parking Brake (page 154).amberPark brake applied

Power steering


Full steering will be maintained but you will needto exert greater force on the steering wheel. Havethe system checked by a properly trained techni-

cian as soon as possible.

amberPower steeringmalfunction

104


Stability control (ESP)



-ESP malfunction

See Using Stability Control (page 155).-ESP off

Start-stop

ActionMessageindicatorMessage

Switch the ignition off before leaving the vehicleif the system has shut down the engine. See Usingstart-stop (page 140).

redAuto StartStop Switchign off

The engine needs to be restarted, press the clutchpedal to start. See Using start-stop (page 140).-Auto StartStop Press

clutch

Select neutral for the system to restart the engine.See Using start-stop (page 140).-Auto StartStop Select

neutral

The system is not functioning. A manual restart isrequired.-StartStop: Man. start

required

Transmission


Have the system checked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately.

redTransmissionmalfunction


amberTransmission over-temperatur

105


Tyre pressure monitoring system


The tyre indicated has continued to deflate.Check the tyre and inflate it to the recommendedpressure. See Technical Specifications (page

240).

redCheck ..... tyre!

One or more of the tyres are significantly under-inflated. This message may be displayed after anew sensor has been installed. Check the tyres

and inflate them to the recommended pressure.See Technical Specifications (page 240).

redCheck tyre pres-sures

The tyre indicated is significantly under-inflated.Check the tyre and inflate it to the recommendedpressure. See Technical Specifications (page

240).

amberCheck ..... tyre

You have installed a temporary spare wheel.Install a correctly inflated full size wheel with a

sensor as soon as possible. When a malfunctionoccurs, the system may not be able to detect or

signal low tyre pressure.

amberTyre monitormalfunction

Up to three sensors have malfunctioned, anunapproved accessory is interfering with the

system or a general malfunction has beendetected. Have the system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as possible. When a

malfunction occurs, the system may not be ableto detect or signal low tyre pressure.

The tyre pressures are not suitable for driving at160 km/h (100 mph). Inflate the tyres to the

recommended pressure. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 240). This message will bedisplayed for only a few seconds with a low tyre

pressure warning.

amberInflate tyres for highspeed

You have installed wheels and tyres that do nothave sensors. The tyre pressures will not be

monitored.

-Tyre sensors notdetected

All sensors have malfunctioned or an unapprovedaccessory is interfering with the system. Have thesystem checked by a properly trained technician

as soon as possible.

106


Voice control


See Voice control (page 279).-Voice controlPlease speak

See Voice control (page 279).-Voice control Notrecognised

See Voice control (page 279).-Voice control Notallowed

107


PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONOutside airKeep the air intakes forward of thewindscreen free from obstruction (snow,leaves etc.) to allow the climate controlsystem to function effectively.

Recirculated airCAUTION

Prolonged use of recirculated air maycause the windows to mist up. If thewindows mist up, follow the settings

for defrosting and demisting thewindscreen.

The air currently in the passengercompartment will be recirculated. Outsideair will not enter the vehicle.

HeatingHeating performance depends on thetemperature of the engine coolant.

Air conditioningNote: The air conditioning operates onlywhen the temperature is above 4°C (39°F).Note: If you use the air conditioning, thefuel consumption of your vehicle will behigher.Air is directed through the evaporatorwhere it is cooled. Humidity is extractedfrom the air to help keep the windows freeof mist. The resulting condensation isdirected to the outside of the vehicle andit is therefore normal if you see a smallpool of water under your vehicle.

General information on controllingthe interior climateFully close all the windows.

Warming the interiorDirect the air towards your feet. In cold orhumid weather conditions, direct some ofthe air towards the windscreen and thedoor windows.

Cooling the interiorDirect the air towards your face.

AIR VENTSFront air vents

E71942

Rear air vents

BA

E89129

OpenACloseB

108

Climate Control

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROLAir distribution control

A

F B

C

D

E

E71379

WindscreenAFootwell and windscreenBFootwellCFace level and footwellDFace levelEFace level and windscreenF

You can set the air distribution control toany position between the symbols.

Blower

E75470

A

OffANote: If you switch the blower off, thewindscreen may mist up.

Recirculated air

E73059

Press the button to toggle between outsideair and recirculated air.

Heating the interior quickly

E71377

109

Climate Control

Ventilation

E71378

Set the air distribution control, blower andair vents to suit your requirements.

Air conditioningSwitching the air conditioning on andoff

If you turn the blower off, the airconditioning will turn off. When you turnthe blower on again, the air conditioningwill come on automatically.

Cooling with outside air

E71380

Cooling the interior quickly

E71381

Defrosting and demisting thewindscreenNote: Turn the air conditioning on to assistwindscreen and side window demisting.Note: Turn the heater control to maximumheat to assist windscreen and side windowdefrosting.

E71382

Make sure that the blower and A/C is on.The indicator in the switch will illuminateduring defrosting and demisting.If you move the air distribution control toa position other than A, the A/C willremain on.You can switch the air conditioning andrecirculated air on and off while the airdistribution control is set to position A.If necessary, switch the heated windowson. See Heated Windows and Mirrors(page 113).

110

Climate Control

Reducing interior air humidity

E71383

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

E91390

The system controls the temperature,amount and distribution of the air flowautomatically and adjusts them accordingto the driving and weather conditions.Pressing the AUTO button once switcheson the auto mode.The system in your vehicle is dual-zoneautomatic climate control. When thesystem is in mono mode, all thetemperature zones are linked to the driver'szone. When you switch mono mode off,the dual-zone system allows you to setdifferent temperatures for the driver's andfront passenger's side.

Note: Avoid adjusting the settings whenthe vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold.The automatic climate control adjusts tothe current circumstances automatically.For the system to function properly, the sideand centre vents should be fully open.Note: The sunload sensor is located on topof the instrument panel. Do not cover thesensor with any objects.Note: At low outside temperatures, whenthe system is in auto mode, the air streamwill be directed to the windscreen and theside windows as long as the engine is cold.Note: For information on the automaticclimate control, on vehicles fitted with acombined Navigation and automaticclimate control system, see separatehandbook.

111

Climate Control

Setting the temperature

E91391

You can set the temperature between15.5ºC (60°F) and 29.5ºC (85°F) in stepsof 0.5ºC (1°F). In position LO, 15ºC (59°F),the system will switch to permanentcooling. In position HI, 30°C (86°F), thesystem will switch to permanent heating.Note: If either position LO or HI is selected,the system will not regulate a stabletemperature.

Mono modeIn mono mode, the temperature settingsfor both the driver’s and passenger’s sideare linked. If you adjust the temperatureusing the rotary control on the driver’s side,the settings will be adjusted to the samesetting on the passenger’s side. In monomode, MONO appears in the display.

To switch mono mode offSelect a temperature for the passenger’sside with the rotary control on thepassenger’s side. Mono mode will switchoff and MONO disappears from thedisplay. The temperature for the driver’sside will remain unchanged. You can nowadjust the driver and passenger sidetemperatures independently of eachanother. The temperature settings for eachside are shown in the display. You can seta temperature difference of up to 4ºC(8°F).Note: If you set a temperature differenceof greater than 4ºC (8°F), the temperatureon the other side will be adjusted so thatthe difference remains 4ºC (8°F).

Note: If you set one of the sides to HI or LO,both sides will be set to HI or LO.

To switch mono mode back on

E70306

To switch mono mode back on,press the MONO button.MONO reappears in the display

and the passenger’s side temperature willbe adjusted to the driver’s sidetemperature.

BlowerUse the buttons to adjust theblower speed.

The blower setting is indicated in thedisplay.To return to auto mode, press the AUTObutton.

Air distributionTo adjust air distribution, press the desiredbutton. Any combination of settings canbe selected simultaneously.

E70308

A B C

FootwellAFace levelBWindscreenC

When you select windscreen defrostingand demisting, A, B and C switch offautomatically and the air conditioningswitches on. Outside air will flow into thevehicle. You cannot select recirculated air.

112

Climate Control

Windscreen defrosting anddemisting

E91392

Press the windscreen defrostingand demisting button. Outsideair will flow into the vehicle. Air

conditioning is automatically selected. Aslong as the air distribution is set to thisposition, you cannot select recirculated air.

The blower speed and the temperaturecontrol operate automatically and cannotbe adjusted manually. The blower is set tohigh speed and the temperature to HI.When you select windscreen defrostingand demisting, the heated screens switchon automatically and switch off after ashort time.To return to auto mode, press the AUTObutton.

Switching the air conditioning onand off

E91393

Press the A/C button to switchthe air conditioning on and off.A/C OFF appears in the display

when the air conditioning is switched off.

A/C ON appears in the display when theair conditioning is switched on.

Recirculated airPress the recirculated air buttonto toggle between outside airand recirculated air.

Note: When the system is in auto mode andthe interior and exterior temperatures arequite hot, the system selects recirculatedair automatically to maximise cooling of theinterior. Once the selected temperature isreached, the system will reselect outside airautomatically.

Switching off the automaticclimate control

E91394

Press the OFF button.

When switched off, the heating, ventilationand air conditioning system is switched offand recirculated air is selected.

HEATED WINDOWS ANDMIRRORSHeated windowsUse the heated windows to defrost ordemist the windscreen or rear window.Note: The heated windows operate onlywhen the engine is running.

Heated windscreen

E72506

Heated rear window

E72507

Heated exterior mirrorsElectric exterior mirrors are fitted with aheating element that will defrost or demistthe mirror glass. They will switch onautomatically when you switch the heatedrear window on.

113

Climate Control

AUXILIARY HEATERParking heater

WARNINGThe parking heater must not beoperated at filling stations, nearsources of combustible vapours or

dust or in enclosed spaces.

The parking heater operates independentlyof the vehicle heater by heating theengine’s coolant circuit. It is fed from thevehicle fuel tank. You can also use it whilethe vehicle is in motion to help the vehicleheater warm up the interior more quickly.Used properly, the parking heater providesthe following benefits:• It preheats the interior of the vehicle.• It keeps the windows clear of ice in the

event of frost and preventscondensation.

• It avoids cold starts and allows theengine to reach operating temperaturesooner.

Note: The parking heater will only operateif there is at least 7.5 litres (1.6 gallons) offuel in the fuel tank and the ambienttemperature is below 15°C (59°F). Theheater will not operate if the battery is low.Note: The heating depends on the outsideair temperature.Note: When the parking heater is activated,exhaust fumes may come from under thesides of the vehicle. This is normal.Note: On vehicles with a manual heating,ventilation and air conditioning system, theheating of the vehicle interior is dependenton the temperature, air distribution andblower control settings.To prevent the battery from discharging:

• Once the parking heater has performedone heating cycle, the nextprogrammed heating cycle will only becarried out if you have started thevehicle’s engine in between.

• After a heating cycle, drive the vehiclefor at least the period of the heatingcycle.

Programming the parking heaterNote: The programmed time is the time atwhich you wish the vehicle to be warm andready to drive, not the time at which theheater switches on.Note: You must programme the times atleast 70 minutes in advance of the time youwish to set.Note: You must set the time and datecorrectly. See Clock (page 127).To programme the heating times:

E70499



3. Highlight Park Heater and press theright arrow button.

114

Climate Control

E74467

One-Time

Program 1Program 2

Active now

Park Heater

• The functions Program 1 andProgram 2 allow you to programmeup to two heating cycles for each dayof the week. These times will remainstored and the heater will warm up thevehicle at these times on these daysevery week.

• The function One-Time allows you toprogramme one heating cycle for onespecific day.

• The function Active nowautomatically switches on the heater.

Programming the functions Program 1and Program 2

E74468

Tuesday

[07:55]Monday

Wednesday

Time 1

ThursdayFriday

1. Highlight Program 1 and press the rightarrow button.

2. Highlight the day on which the heatershould warm up the vehicle.

3. Press the OK button to confirm theselection. A cross appears in the boxnext to the day to show that this day isselected.

4. Continue in the same way to select allthe days on which the heater shouldwarm up the vehicle.

5. To set the time at which the vehicleshould be warmed up, highlight thetime at the top of the display and pressthe right arrow button.

6. Press the OK button and the hoursflash. Use the up and down arrowbuttons to adjust the individual settingsand the left and right arrow buttons tomove to the next or previous setting.

7. When you have finished, press the OKbutton again to confirm the selection.

E74469

07:5501:12:2006

ParkheaterProgram 1

OK = change

You can use the function Program 2 to seta second cycle, for example different timeson different days or twice on the same day.The programming procedure is the sameas for the function Program 1.

115

Climate Control

Programming the function One-Time1. Highlight One-Time and press the right

arrow button.2. Press the OK button and the hours

flash. Use the up and down arrowbuttons to adjust the individual settingsand the left and right arrow buttons tomove to the next or previous setting.

3. When you have finished, press the OKbutton again to confirm the selection.

Active nowHighlight Active now and press the OKbutton. A cross appears in the box next tothe function to show that the heater isactivated.To deactivate the heater, highlight Activenow and press the OK button again.

Remote startingThe parking heater may be started andswitched off from a distance of up to 500metres (1640 feet) using the suppliedremote control transmitter. This range willvary depending upon local conditions andterrain, as well as battery condition. Theremote control transmitter will indicatewhether or not the signal has beenreceived. The parking heater will operatefor a maximum of 30 minutes.Note: The heater will operate, dependingon the ambient temperature, for between10 and 30 minutes. The interior will cooldown after the heating period has elapsed,therefore a remote start more than 30minutes before driving is not recommended.Note: The remote control may not alwaysreceive confirmation of a successful remotecommand at extended operating ranges.

StartingHold the transmitter with the antennaupwards and press the ON button for atleast two seconds. The LED on thetransmitter lights up green to confirm thesignal has been received.

Switching offHold the transmitter with the antennaupwards and press the OFF button for atleast two seconds. The LED on thetransmitter lights up red to confirm thesignal has been received.

Remote start in combination withdirect start or timer

E114360

Remote start is integrated with normalheater control. Parking heaters started withdirect start or timer functions can beswitched off with the remote controltransmitter and vice versa.

Feedback during starting andswitching offThe LED on the transmitter illuminatesgreen for about two seconds. Thisindicates the signal has been received bythe vehicle and the heater has started.The LED on the transmitter illuminates redfor about two seconds. This indicates thesignal has been received by the vehicle andthe heater has switched off.

116

Climate Control

The LED on the transmitter flashes greenor red for about two seconds. Thisindicates the signal was not transmittedcorrectly. Repeat the transmission.The LED on the transmitter illuminatesorange for about two seconds beforeshowing green or red. This indicates thetransmitter batteries are weak and shouldbe changed.The LED on the transmitter flashes orangefor about 5 seconds. This indicates thatthe signal was not transmitted. Thetransmitter batteries are discharged andshould be changed as soon as possible.

Changing the remote controlbatteryMake sure that you dispose of old batteriesin an environmentally friendly way. Seekadvice from your local authority regardingrecycling.

E114361

2

1

1. Insert a screwdriver or other suitabletool into the slot on the back of theremote control, and unscrew thecompartment cover.

CAUTIONDo not touch the battery contacts orthe printed circuit board with thescrewdriver.

2. Carefully prise out the battery.

3. Install a new battery (3.3V typeCR1-3N) with the + facing upwards.

4. Re-assemble the remote control.

Programming the transmitterFurther transmitters may be used with theremote system, please consult your dealer.Up to a maximum of 3 separate remotecontrols may be added. When adding extratransmitters these must be programmedseparately.Note: The heater must be switched offduring programming.Note: The programming procedure may berepeated as often as is required. The oldestprogrammed transmitter will be deletedeach time.1. Install the battery in the new

transmitter.2. Turn off the power to the receiver by

removing fuse F32 from the enginecompartment fuse box. See FuseSpecification Chart (page 196).

3. Wait for at least 5 seconds.4. Reconnect power to the receiver by

replacing the fuse, and press the OFFbutton on the new transmitter within5 seconds until the LED light turns off.

5. The new transmitter is nowprogrammed.

Fuel operated heater (dependingon country)

WARNINGThe fuel operated heater must notbe operated at filling stations, nearsources of combustible vapours or

dust or in enclosed spaces.

117

Climate Control

The fuel operated heater aids in warmingthe engine and the vehicle interior onvehicles with a diesel engine. It is switchedon or off automatically depending on theoutside air temperature and the coolanttemperature, unless you have deactivatedit. When the fuel operated heater isoperating, Aux. Heater on is displayed inthe information display. See InformationDisplays (page 85).To deactivate the fuel operated heater:

E70499



3. Highlight Aux. Heater and press theOK button to toggle the heater on andoff. A cross appears in the box whenthe heater is activated.


Diesel auxiliary heater (dependingon country)The diesel auxiliary heater (PTC electricalheater) aids in warming the vehicle interioron vehicles with a diesel engine. It isswitched on or off automaticallydepending on the outside air temperature,the coolant temperature and the alternatorload.

ELECTRIC SUNROOF

WARNINGBefore operating the electric sunroofyou should verify it is free ofobstructions and ensure that children

and/or pets are not in the proximity of thesunroof opening. Failure to do so couldresult in serious personal injury. It is theprimary responsibility of the supervisingadults to never leave a child unattendedin a vehicle and to never leave the keys inan unattended vehicle.

Note: When the switches are operatedoften during a short period of time, thesystem might become inoperable for acertain time to prevent damage due tooverheating.Note: The electric sunroof can also beoperated with the ignition off via the globalopening and global closing function. SeeGlobal Opening and Closing (page 40).There are two ways of opening the sunroof– the rear of the sunroof lifts open or thesunroof opens from the front, sliding backunder the roof. The sunroof opens andcloses whilst the switch is pressed.Switch on the ignition to operate theelectric sunroof.The power sunroof is operated by a switchlocated between the sun visors.

118

Climate Control

Opening and closing the sunroof

E72188

Tilting the sunroof

E72189

Opening and closing the sunroofautomaticallyNote: When opening automatically, thesunroof will stop about 8 cm from the fullyopened position. This position reduces thebuffeting noise which is sometimes heardwhen the sunroof is fully open. The sunroofwill only stop automatically in this positionwhen the sunroof is opened automatically.

To open or close the sunroof automaticallypress either side of the switch to thesecond action point and release itcompletely. Press again to stop.When the closed position is reached, thesunroof stops automatically.

Sunroof anti-trap protectionWARNINGS

The anti-trap function is deactivateduntil the memory has been reset.Careless closing of the window can

cause injuries.Careless closing of the electricsunroof can override the anti-trapprotection and cause injuries.

The sunroof will stop automatically whileclosing and reverse some distance if thereis an obstacle in the way.To override anti-trap protection when thereis a resistance, e. g. in the winter, proceedas follows:

WARNINGWhile the sunroof is being closed forthe third time, the anti-trap functionis disabled. Make sure there are no

obstacles in the way of the closing sunroof.

Close the sunroof a third time to theresistance. The anti-trap function isdisabled and the sunroof cannot be closedautomatically. The sunroof will overridethe resistance and can then be closed fully.If the sunroof does not close after the thirdattempt, have it checked by an expert.

119

Climate Control

Sunroof safety modeWARNING

The anti-trap function is not activeduring this procedure. Make sure thatthere are no obstacles in the way of

the closing sunroof.

If the system detects a malfunction, itenters a safety mode. The sunroof willmove for only about 0.5 seconds at a timeand then stop again. Close the sunroof bypressing the button again when thesunroof stops moving. When the rear ofthe sunroof is lifted, lift the rear all the wayand then close the sunroof. Have thesystem checked by an expert immediately.

Sunroof relearningWARNING

The anti-trap function is not activeduring this procedure. Make sure thatthere are no obstacles in the way of

the closing sunroof.

In case the sunroof no longer closesproperly, follow this relearning procedure:• Tilt the rear of the sunroof as far as

possible. Release the button.• Press and hold the same button again

for 30 seconds until you see thesunroof move.

• Release the button and immediatelypress and hold it again. The sunroofwill close, open fully and then closeagain. Do not release the button beforethe sunroof has reached the closedposition for the second time.

If the button is not pressed continuously,the relearning function will be interrupted.Start the procedure once more from thebeginning.

120

Climate Control

SITTING IN THE CORRECTPOSITION

E68595

WARNINGSDo not adjust the seats when thevehicle is moving.Only when you use the seat beltproperly, can it hold you in a positionthat allows the airbag to achieve its

optimum effect.

When you use them properly, the seat,head restraint, seat belt and airbags willprovide optimum protection in the eventof a collision. We recommend that you:• sit in an upright position with the base

of your spine as far back as possible.• do not recline the seatback more than

30 degrees.• adjust the head restraint so that the

top of it is level with the top of yourhead and as far forwards as possible,remaining comfortable.

• keep sufficient distance betweenyourself and the steering wheel. Werecommend a minimum of 250millimetres (10 inches) between yourbreastbone and the airbag cover.

• hold the steering wheel with your armsslightly bent.

• bend your legs slightly so that you canpress the pedals fully.

• position the shoulder strap of the seatbelt over the centre of your shoulderand position the lap strap tightly acrossyour hips.

Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and that you can maintain fullcontrol of your vehicle.

MANUAL SEATSMoving the seats backwards andforwards

E70728

WARNINGRock the seat backwards andforwards after releasing the lever tomake sure that it is fully engaged in

its catch.

121

Seats

Adjusting the lumbar support

E70729

Adjusting the height of the driver’sseat

E70730

Adjusting the angle of theseatback

E70731

POWER SEATS2-way electric seat

E70733

1

1

2

2

122

Seats

8-way electric seat

12 2 1 3

4

3

4

8 7

8 7

5

6

5

6E70734

123

Seats

HEAD RESTRAINTSAdjusting the head restraint

WARNINGSRaise the rear head restraint whenthe rear seat is occupied by apassenger.When using a forward facing childrestraint on a rear seat, alwaysremove the head restraint from that

seat.

E71879

Adjust the head restraint so that the topof it is level with the top of your head andas far forwards as possible, remainingcomfortable.

Removing the head restraintPress the locking buttons and remove thehead restraint.

REAR SEATS

WARNINGSWhen folding the seatbacks down,take care not to get your fingerscaught between the seatback and

seat frame.Make sure that the seats and theseatbacks are secure and fullyengaged in their catches.

Folding the seatbacks downCAUTION

Lower the head restraints.

1

2

1

E86611

1. Press the unlock buttons down andhold them there.

2. Push the seatback forwards.

Creating a level load floorWARNING

Make sure the red indicator is notshowing when you engage the seatin the catches.

124

Seats

CAUTIONLower the head restraints.

2

13

2

E86612

1. Insert your fingers between the seatcushion and seatback and fold the seatcushion forwards.

2. Press the unlock buttons down andhold them there.

3. Push the seatback forwards.

Folding the seatbacks upWARNING

When folding the seatbacks up,make sure that the belts are visibleto an occupant and not caught

behind the seat.

HEATED SEATSNote: Operating this function with theengine off will drain the battery.

E70601

E71224

Note: The number of illuminated lightsbeside the button indicates the selectedstep.Note: The heater setting is indicated in red.Note: When no light is illuminated, theheating is switched off.Note: Only the front seat settings are storedwhen you switch off the ignition.

Raising and Lowering theTemperaturePress and hold the relevant button or pressit repeatedly to select the desiredtemperature.

125

Seats

VENTILATED SEATSNote: Operating this function with theengine off will drain the battery.

E70601

E70602

Note: The number of illuminated lightsbeside the button indicates the selectedstep.Note: The ventilation setting is indicated inblue.Note: When no light is illuminated, theventilation is switched off.Note: The settings are stored when theignition is switched off.

Note: When the seat is being ventilated,the heater may switch on automatically.This is to prevent the flow of air becominguncomfortably cool.Note: The air in the vehicle interior is usedto ventilate the seats. The cooling effecttherefore depends on the temperature ofthe vehicle interior. Switch on the airconditioning if necessary and set the airdistribution to footwell. See ClimateControl (page 108).

Raising and Lowering theTemperaturePress and hold the relevant button or pressit repeatedly to select the desiredtemperature.

126

Seats

SUN SHADESPull the blind up and attach it to the hooks(A).Side windows

E74809

AA

Rear windowAA

E86514

INSTRUMENT LIGHTINGDIMMER

E70723

CLOCKNote: Some navigation systems willautomatically set the date and time on theclock using GPS signals.Note: See General Information (page 85).1. From the main menu, select the clock

function.2. Select the option required.3. Press OK.4. Using the right, left, up and down arrow

buttons, select and change the value.5. Press OK.

CIGAR LIGHTER

CAUTIONSIf you use the socket when the engineis not running, the battery maydischarge.Do not hold the cigar lighter elementpressed in.

127

Convenience features

Note: Switch the ignition on to use the cigarlighter. You can also use it for up to 30minutes after you have switched the ignitionoff.Note: You can use the socket to power 12volt appliances that have a maximumcurrent rating of 15 Amperes. Use only Fordaccessory connectors or connectorsspecified for use with SAE standard sockets.

E72972

Press the element in to use the cigarlighter. It will pop out automatically.

ASHTRAYFront ashtray

E72974

To empty, pull out the complete ashtray.

Rear ashtray

E73705

To remove the ashtray, open it, press itdown against the spring and remove it.

AUXILIARY POWER POINTS

WARNINGIf used when the engine is notrunning, the battery may discharge.

Note: You can use them with the ignitionswitched off.Note: You can use them to power 12 voltappliances that have a maximum currentrating of 15 Amperes. Use only Fordaccessory connectors or connectorsspecified for use with SAE standard sockets.

E78056

Locations:• Centre console.• Luggage compartment.

128


CUP HOLDERS

WARNINGDo not place hot drinks in the cupholders when the vehicle is moving.

GLOVE BOXCooled glove boxNote: You can cool the glove box using airfrom the air conditioning system.

E70885

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

WARNINGDo not drive with any storagecompartment lid open. Make surethat you secure the lid before setting

off.

CAUTIONDo not keep heat-sensitive items andliquids in any storage compartment.

E73704 E72905

E72905

129


MAP POCKETS

E74686

MEMORY FUNCTION

WARNINGSBefore activating the seat memory,make sure that the area immediatelysurrounding the seat is clear of

obstructions and that all occupants areclear of moving parts.

The memory store function cannotbe used when the vehicle is moving.

A

BE86768

Seat adjustment controls SeePower Seats (page 122).

A

Memory pre-set buttonsB

Up to four different driver's seat andexterior mirror positions can be stored inthe memory. Your preferred setting for thereverse mirror dipping feature can also bestored. See Electric exterior mirrors(page 74).

Setting a memory pre-setPassive settingThe vehicle stores the seating and mirrorpositions for up to four remote controls orpassive keys. Next time the vehicle isunlocked, the position of the seat andmirrors will adjust to the last used position.Each time you turn the ignition off, thecurrent seat and mirror settings are storedon the remote control or passive key used.

Active setting1. Turn the ignition on.2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to

the desired position.3. Press and hold the desired pre-set

button B until a single chime soundsto confirm.

130


Recalling a stored seat positionNote: To stop seat movement during arecall, press any driver seat adjustmentcontrol, any of the memory buttons or anymirror control switch. Seat movement willalso stop if you move the vehicle.

Passive recallNote: If more than one passive key is inrange, the memory function will move to thesettings of the first key stored.When you unlock the vehicle with theremote control or pull the driver doorhandle with a passive key in range, the seatand mirrors will move to the position storedon that remote control or passive key.

Active recallPress the pre-set button associated withthe desired driving position. The seat andmirrors will move to the position stored onthat pre-set.

Resetting the memoryIf any seat position travel is interrupted(e.g. an obstacle in the way or loss ofpower supply), you will need to reset thememory.Note: Make sure all electrical accessoriesare switched off.1. Turn the ignition to position II.2. Operate the seat adjustment control

to move the seat in the requireddirection until it stops. See PowerSeats (page 122). A click will be heard.

3. Release the seat adjustment controland immediately press and hold theswitch in the same direction for at least3 seconds. Keep it held until the seatstops at the mechanical end of itstravel and a click is heard.

4. Release the seat adjustment control.

5. Operate the same seat adjustmentcontrol in the opposite direction for atleast 3 seconds. Keep it held until theseat stops at the mechanical end of itstravel and a click is heard.

GLASSES HOLDER

E131605

CD CHANGERThis is located in the luggagecompartment.

AUXILIARY INPUT SOCKETYou can find the socket in the glove box orthe centre console. See Auxiliary input(AUX IN) socket (page 270).

USB PORTYou can find the socket in the glove box orthe centre console. See Connectivity(page 297).

131


FLOOR MATS

WARNINGWhen using the floor mats, alwaysmake sure the floor mat is properlysecured using the appropriate fixings

and positioned so that it does not interferewith the operation of the pedals.

132


GENERAL INFORMATIONGeneral points on startingIf the battery has been disconnected thevehicle may exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics for approx. 8 kilometres (5miles) after reconnecting the battery.This is because the engine managementsystem must realign itself with the engine.Any unusual driving characteristics duringthis period may be disregarded.

Starting the engine by towing orpushing

WARNINGTo prevent damage you must notpush or tow start your vehicle. Usebooster cables and a booster battery.

See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page227).

IGNITION SWITCH

WARNINGNever return the key to position 0 orI when the vehicle is in motion.

E72128

0 The ignition is off.I The ignition and all main electrical circuitsare disabled.Note: Do not leave the ignition key in thisposition for too long to avoid dischargingthe battery.

II The ignition is switched on. All electricalcircuits are operational. Warning lampsand indicators illuminate. This is the keyposition when driving. You must also selectit when being towed.III The starter motor is activated. Releasethe key as soon as the engine starts.

KEYLESS STARTING

WARNINGSThe keyless starting system may notfunction if the key is close to metalobjects or electronic devices such as

mobile phones.Always check that the steering wheellock is deactivated beforeattempting to move your vehicle.

See Steering Wheel Lock (page 135).

Note: The ignition may automaticallyswitch off after a period of time if yourvehicle has been left unattended with theignition on. This is to prevent the vehiclebattery from discharging.Note: A valid passive key must be locatedinside the vehicle to switch the ignition onand start the engine.Note: To start your engine you must alsofully depress the brake or clutch pedal,depending on the transmission fitted.

E85766

Ignition onPress the button once. All electrical circuitsare operational, warning lamps andindicators illuminate.

133

Starting and Stopping the Engine

Starting with manual transmissionNote: Releasing the clutch pedal duringengine start will stop the engine crankingand return to ignition on.1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Briefly press the button.3. If the engine does not start, fully

depress the brake and clutch pedals.

Starting with automatictransmissionNote: Releasing the brake pedal duringengine start will stop the engine crankingand return to ignition on.1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P or N.2. Fully depress the brake pedal.3. Briefly press the button.

Starting a diesel engineNote: Engine cranking may not commenceuntil the engine glow plug cycle has beencompleted. This may take several secondsin extremely cold conditions.Note: Continue to press the clutch or brakepedal until engine cranking begins.

Failure to startThe passive starting system will notfunction if:• The passive key frequencies are

jammed.• The passive key battery is flat.If you are unable to start your vehicle carryout the following procedure.

Type 1

E87382

1. Hold the key next to the steeringcolumn shroud exactly as shown.

2. With the key in this position you canuse the button to switch the ignition onand start your vehicle.

Type 2

E87381

1. Carefully prise out the cover.

134


E85767

2. Insert the key into the key holder.

E85766

3. With the key in this position you canpress the button to switch the ignitionon and start your vehicle.

Stopping the engine with thevehicle stationaryNote: The ignition, all electrical circuits,warning lamps and indicators will beswitched off.

Manual transmissionBriefly press the button.

Automatic transmission1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P.2. Briefly press the button.

Stopping the engine when thevehicle is moving

WARNINGSwitching off the engine when thevehicle is still moving will result in aloss of brake and steering assistance.

The steering will not be locked, but highereffort will be required. When the ignition isswitched off some electrical circuits,warning lamps and indicators may also beOFF.

Press and hold the button for two seconds,or press three times within three seconds.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK

WARNINGAlways check that the steering isunlocked before attempting to moveyour vehicle.

Vehicles without keyless startingTo activate the steering wheel lock;1. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.2. Turn the steering wheel.

Vehicles with keyless startingNote: The steering wheel lock will notactivate when the ignition is on or thevehicle is moving.Your vehicle has an electronicallycontrolled steering wheel lock. Thisoperates automatically.The steering wheel lock will activate aftera short period of time once you haveparked your vehicle and the passive key isoutside of the vehicle.

135


Deactivating the steering wheel lockSwitch the ignition on, or:Vehicles with automatic transmission• Press the brake pedal.Vehicles with manual transmission• Press the clutch pedal.

STARTING A PETROL ENGINENote: You can only operate the starter fora limited period of time, for example 10seconds. The number of start attempts islimited to approximately six. If you exceedthis limit, the system will not allow you totry again until a period of time has elapsed,for example 30 minutes. A message will beshown in the display. See InformationMessages (page 98).

Cold or hot engineVehicles with manual transmissionNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.Note: Releasing the clutch pedal duringengine start may stop the engine crankingand return to ignition on.1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Start the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.Note: Releasing the brake pedal duringengine start may stop the engine crankingand return to ignition on.1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P or N.2. Fully depress the brake pedal.3. Start the engine.

All vehiclesIf the engine does not start, wait for a shortperiod and try again.If the engine does not start after threeattempts, wait 10 seconds and follow theflooded engine procedure.If you have difficulty starting the enginewhen the temperature is below -25°C(-13°F), press the accelerator pedal to themid-way point of its travel and try again.

Flooded engineVehicles with manual transmission1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and

hold it there.3. Start the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmission1. Move the transmission selector lever

to position P or N.2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and

hold it there.3. Fully depress the brake pedal.4. Start the engine.

All vehiclesIf the engine does not start, repeat the coldor hot engine procedure.

Engine idle speed after startingThe speed at which the engine idlesimmediately after starting will varydepending on the engine temperature.The idle speed is automatically increasedwhen the engine is cold this is to heat thecatalytic converter. This keeps the vehicleemissions to an absolute minimum.The idle speed will slowly decrease to thenormal level as the catalytic converterwarms up.

136


STARTING A PETROL ENGINE- E85For general information on starting a petrolengine. See Starting a Petrol Engine(page 136).

Starting at low ambienttemperaturesWhen the temperature is lower than -10°C(14°F) and the vehicle is filled with E85, anengine block heater should be used tofacilitate starting. See Engine BlockHeater (page 138). Failure to do this willresult in a non start.If the temperature is expected to remainbelow -10°C (14°F), it is recommendedthat you increase the proportion of petrolin the tank by topping up with 95 octaneunleaded petrol if the tank is not alreadyfull. About 10 litres (2.2 gallons) of petrolwill reduce the proportion of E85 in a ¾ fulltank from 85% to 70% and willconsiderably improve cold start capability.If, at very low temperatures, the tank isfilled with only E85 and there is no way touse an engine block heater, you mayexperience difficulties starting the engine.If the engine fails to start, proceed asfollows:1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal.2. Turn the ignition key to position III.

CAUTIONRelease the ignition key as soon asthe engine has started.

3. Gradually release the accelerator pedalafter five seconds of engine crankingor as the engine speed rises.

If the engine fails to start, repeat steps 1, 2and 3, or connect an engine block heaterfor two hours before attempting anotherstart.

During starting, the fuel injectors are turnedoff as long as the accelerator pedal isdepressed. This can be used to drainexcessive fuel from the intake manifoldafter several unsuccessful startingattempts.If the battery has been disconnected orafter the fuel type has been changed, theidle speed may be irregular. This willimprove after 10 to 30 seconds.

STARTING A DIESEL ENGINECold or hot engineAll vehiclesNote: When the temperature is below -15°C(5°F), you may need to crank the engine forup to 25 seconds.Note: Continue cranking the engine until itstarts.Note: You can only operate the starter fora maximum of 30 seconds at a time.

Switch the ignition on and waituntil the glow plug indicator goesoff.

Vehicles with manual transmissionNote: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.2. Start the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmission1. Select park or neutral.2. Fully depress the brake pedal.3. Start the engine.

137


DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTERThe DPF forms part of the emissionsreduction systems fitted to your vehicle. Itfilters harmful diesel particulates (soot)from the exhaust gas.

RegenerationWARNING

Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The DPF

regeneration process creates very highexhaust gas temperatures and the exhaustwill radiate a considerable amount of heatduring and after DPF regeneration, andafter you have switched the engine off.This is a potential fire hazard.

CAUTIONAvoid running out of fuel.

Note: During regeneration at low speed orengine idle, you may smell a hot metallicodour and could notice a clicking metallicsound. This is due to the high temperaturesreached during regeneration and is normal.Note: After you have switched your engineoff the fans may continue to run for a shortperiod of time.Unlike a normal filter which requiresperiodic replacement, the DPF has beendesigned to regenerate, or clean itself tomaintain operating efficiency. Theregeneration process takes placeautomatically. However, some drivingconditions mean that you may need tosupport the regeneration process.

If you drive only short distances or yourjourneys contain frequent stopping andstarting, where there is increasedacceleration and deceleration, occasionaltrips with the following conditions willassist the regeneration process:• Drive your vehicle at a constant speed,

preferably on a main road or motorway,for up to 20 minutes.

• Avoid prolonged idling and alwaysobserve speed limits and roadconditions.

• Do not switch off the ignition.• Use a lower gear than normal to

maintain a higher engine speed duringthis journey, where appropriate.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINEVehicles with a turbocharger

CAUTIONDo not switch the engine off when itis running at high speed. If you do, theturbocharger will continue running

after the engine oil pressure has droppedto zero. This will lead to prematureturbocharger bearing wear.

Release the accelerator pedal. Wait untilthe engine has reached idle speed and thenswitch it off.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER

CAUTIONMake sure you disconnect the powercable from the engine heaterconnector before driving away.

Note: The engine heater connector islocated in the radiator grille at the front ofyour vehicle.

138


E97918

Connect the engine heater for 2 to 3 hoursbefore starting the engine.

139


PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

CAUTIONFor vehicles with Start-stop thebattery requirement is different. Itmust be replaced by one of exactly

the same specification as the original.

The system reduces fuel consumption andCO2 emissions by shutting down theengine when the vehicle is idling, forexample at traffic lights. The engine willautomatically restart when the driverpresses the clutch pedal or when requiredby a vehicle system, for example torecharge the battery.To obtain maximum benefit from thesystem, move the gear lever to the neutralposition and release the clutch pedalduring any stop of longer than threeseconds.

USING START-STOP

WARNINGSThe engine may restartautomatically if required by thesystem. See Principle of Operation

(page 140).Switch the ignition off beforeopening the bonnet or carrying outany maintenance.Always switch the ignition off beforeleaving your vehicle, as the systemmay have shut down the engine but

the ignition will still be live.

Note: The system only operates when theengine is warm and the outside temperatureis between 0°C (32°F) and 30°C (86°F).

Note: If you stall the engine, and thendepress the clutch pedal within a couple ofseconds, the system will automaticallyrestart the engine.Note: The Start-stop indicator willilluminate green when the engine shutsdown. See Warning Lamps and Indicators(page 81).Note: The Start-stop indicator will flashamber, requiring you to select neutral ordepress the clutch pedal. In conjunction amessage will be shown in the display.Note: If the system detects a malfunction,it is deactivated. Have the system checkedby a properly trained technician.Note: If you have switched the system off,the switch will be illuminated.Note: The system is on by default. Toswitch the system off, press the switch inthe instrument panel. The system will onlybe de-activated for the current ignitioncycle. To turn it on, press the switch again.For item location. See At a Glance (page11).

To stop the engine1. Stop the vehicle.2. Move the gear lever to the neutral

position.3. Release the clutch pedal.4. Release the accelerator pedal.The system may not shut down the engineunder certain conditions, for example:• To maintain the interior climate.• Low battery voltage.• The outside temperature is too low or

too high.• The driver's door has been opened.

140

Start-Stop

• Low engine operating temperature.• Low brake system vacuum.• If a road speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) has

not been exceeded.• The driver's seat belt has not been

fastened.

To re-start the engineNote: The gear lever must be in the neutralposition.Depress the clutch pedal.The system may automatically restart theengine under certain conditions, forexample:• Low battery voltage.• To maintain the interior climate.

141

Start-Stop

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe system assists the driver to drive moreefficiently by constantly monitoringcharacteristics of gear changing,anticipation of traffic conditions andspeeds on motorways and open roads.Note: These efficiency values do not resultin a defined fuel consumption figure. It mightvary as it is not only related to these drivingdisciplines but also influenced by manyother factors such as short journeys and coldstarts.Note: Frequent short journeys, where theengine does not fully warm up, will alsoincrease fuel consumption.The value of these characteristics isrepresented by petals shown in the display,with five petals being the most efficient.The more efficiently you drive, the betterthe rating, and the better your overall fuelconsumption.

Type 1

E121813 CBA

Gear shiftingAAnticipationBEfficient speedC

Gear shiftingUsing the highest drivable gear appropriatefor the road conditions will improve fuelconsumption.

AnticipationAdjusting your vehicle speed and thedistance to other vehicles without the needfor heavy braking or acceleration willimprove fuel consumption.

Efficient speedHigher speeds use more fuel. Reducingyour cruising speed on open roads willimprove fuel consumption.

Type 2 and 3The relevant information will be shown inthe display.

USING ECO MODEThe system is accessed using the relevantinformation display menu. SeeInformation Displays (page 85).

Resetting Eco modeReset the average fuel consumption.Note: New values may take a short time tocalculate.

142

Eco Mode

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNINGSStop refuelling after the fuel nozzlestops the second time. Additionalfuel will fill the expansion space in

the fuel tank which could lead to fueloverflowing. Fuel spillage could behazardous to other road users.

Do not use any kind of flames or heatnear the fuel system. The fuel systemis under pressure. There is a risk of

injury if the fuel system is leaking.

FUEL QUALITY - PETROL

CAUTIONDo not use leaded petrol or petrol withadditives containing other metalliccompounds (e.g. manganese-based).

They could damage the emission system.

Note: We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel without additives or otherengine treatments.Use minimum 95 octane unleaded petrolthat meets the specification defined by EN228, or the equivalent nationalspecification.Your vehicle is suitable for use with ethanolblends up to 10% (E5 and E10).

FUEL QUALITY - E85

WARNINGSDo not modify the fuel systemconfiguration or the components inthe system.Do not replace the fuel system or thecomponents with parts not speciallydesigned to be used with E85.

CAUTIONSDo not use leaded petrol or petrol withadditives containing other metalliccompounds (e.g. manganese-based).

They could damage the emission system.Do not use methanol instead of E85.

Note: We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel without additives or otherengine treatments.Note: When using E85, you may experiencea higher fuel consumption.Note: Your vehicle will operate well oncommercial quality 95 octane unleadedpetrol, but only high quality E85 offers thesame protection and performance.Use minimum 95 octane unleadedpetrol that meets the specification definedby EN 228, or equivalent. You can also usea mixture of unleaded petrol and E85.

Long-term storageDue to small amounts of corrosiveimpurities that may be found in the E85, itis recommended that you fill the tank withonly 95 octane unleaded petrol prior tolong-term storage of your vehicle.

FUEL QUALITY - DIESEL

WARNINGDo not mix diesel with oil, petrol orother liquids. This could cause achemical reaction.

CAUTIONSDo not add kerosene, paraffin orpetrol to diesel. This could causedamage to the fuel system.

143

Fuel and Refuelling

CAUTIONSUse diesel that meets thespecification defined by EN 590, orthe relevant national specification.

Note: We recommend that you use onlyhigh quality fuel.Note: The use of additives or other enginetreatments not approved by Ford is notrecommended.Note: We do not recommend the prolongeduse of additives intended to prevent fuelwaxing.

Long-term storageMost diesel fuels contain bio-diesel, it isrecommended to fill the tank with purelymineral diesel (where available) or add ananti-oxidant prior to long-term storage ofyour vehicle exceeding two months. Yourdealer can help you with a suitableanti-oxidant.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

WARNINGDo not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The exhaust

will radiate a considerable amount of heatduring use, and after you have switchedthe engine off. This is a potential firehazard.

Driving with a catalytic converterCAUTIONS

Avoid running out of fuel.

Do not crank the engine for longperiods.Do not run the engine when a sparkplug lead is disconnected.

CAUTIONSDo not push-start or tow-start yourvehicle. Use booster cables. SeeJump-Starting the Vehicle (page

227).Do not switch the ignition off whendriving.

FUEL FILLER FLAP

WARNINGSTake care when refuelling to avoidspilling any residual fuel from the fuelnozzle.Do not use any kind of flames or heatnear the fuel system. The fuel systemis under pressure. There is a risk of

injury if the fuel system is leaking.

CAUTIONIf you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray the fuelfiller flap briefly from a distance not

less than 200 millimetres (8 inches).

Note: Central locking also locks andunlocks the fuel filler flap. See Locking andUnlocking (page 38).

E86613

1. Press the flap to open it. Open the flapfully until it engages.

144

Fuel and Refuelling

E139202

A

Note: When you insert the fuel nozzle, aspring loaded inhibitor will open if thecorrect size nozzle is detected. This helpsto avoid filling up with the wrong fuel.2. Insert the fuel nozzle up to and

including the first notch on the nozzleA. Keep it resting on the cover of thefuel pipe opening.

WARNINGStop refuelling after the fuel nozzlestops the second time. Additionalfuel will fill the expansion space in

the fuel tank which could lead to fueloverflowing. Fuel spillage could behazardous to other road users.

E139203

A

B

Incorrect positionACorrect positionB

3. Do not lift the nozzle during refilling. Thiscan affect the flow of fuel and shut off ofthe fuel nozzle before the fuel tank is full.

E139355

4. Operate the nozzle within the areashown.

WARNINGSWe recommend that you remove thefuel nozzle slowly to allow anyresidual fuel to drain into the fuel

tank. Alternatively you can wait 10 secondsbefore removing the fuel nozzle.

Do not remove the nozzle from itsfully inserted position during theentire refuelling process.

145

Fuel and Refuelling

E119081

5. Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to removeit.

Refuelling with a fuel canUse the funnel which is located in the sparewheel well.

REFUELLING

CAUTIONDo not attempt to start the engine ifyou have filled the fuel tank with theincorrect fuel. This could damage the

engine. Have the system checked by aproperly trained technician immediately.

REFUELLING - E85

CAUTIONDo not attempt to start the engine ifyou have filled the fuel tank with theincorrect fuel. This could damage the

engine. Have the system checked by aproperly trained technician immediately.

After refuelling, allow 5 minutes of normalengine operation above 48 km/h (30 mph)to reduce the risk of an increased enginerestart time.

FUEL CONSUMPTIONThe CO2 and fuel consumption figures arederived from laboratory tests according toEEC Directive 80/1268/EEC andsubsequent amendments and are carriedout by all vehicle manufacturers.They are intended as a comparisonbetween makes and models of vehicles.They are not intended to represent the realworld fuel consumption you may get fromyour vehicle. Real world fuel consumptionis governed by many factors including;driving style, high speed driving, stop/startdriving, air conditioning usage, theaccessories fitted and towing etc.Your Ford dealer can give you advice onimproving your fuel consumption.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

146

Fuel and Refuelling

4-door and 5-doorFuel Consumption Figures

CO2 Emis-sionsCombinedExtra-UrbanUrban

Variantg/kml/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)

1707.2 (39.2)5.6 (50.4)10 (28.2)1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCTStage IV (92kW/125PS), 5-speed manual transmission

1566.7 (42.2)5.3 (53.3)9.1 (31)1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCTStage V (88kW/120PS), 5-speed manual transmission

1556.6 (42.8)5.3 (53.3)8.9 (31.7)1.6L EcoBoost(118kW/160PS), 6-speedmanual transmission

1897.9 (35.8)6 (47.1)11.2 (25.2)2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4Stage IV (107kW/145PS)

1848 (35.3)6 (47.1)11.3 (25)2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4Stage V (107kW/145PS)

1767.6 (37.2)6 (47.1)10.4 (27.2)2.0L EcoBoost - MI4(149kW/203PS), 6-speedmanual transmission

1767.6 (37.2)6 (47.1)10.4 (27.2)2.0L EcoBoost - MI4(177kW/240PS), 6-speedmanual transmission

1797.7 (36.7)6 (47.1)10.7 (26.4)2.0L EcoBoost - MI4(149kW/203PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

1797.7 (36.7)6 (47.1)10.9 (26.4)2.0L EcoBoost - MI4(177kW/240PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

2239.3 (30.4)6.7 (42.2)13.8 (20.5)2.3L Duratec-HE - MI4(118kW/160PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

147

Fuel and Refuelling


Variantg/kml/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)

1294.9 (57.6)4.2 (67.3)6 (47.1)1.6L Duratorq-TDCi(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmissionwithout start-stop

1144.3 (65.7)3.9 (72.4)5 (56.5)1.6L Duratorq-TDCi(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmission withstart-stop ECONETIC

1254.7 (60.1)4.2 (67.3)5.6 (50.4)1.6L Duratorq-TDCi(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmission withstart-stop

1545.8 (48.7)4.8 (58.9)7.5 (37.7)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DWStage IV, 6-speed manualtransmission

1294.9 (57.6)4.2 (67.3)6.1 (46.3)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DWStage V, 6-speed manualtransmission

1395.3 (53.3)4.6 (61.4)6.4 (44.1)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DWStage IV (85kW/115PS), 6-speed manual transmissionECONETIC

1877.1 (39.8)5.5 (51.4)9.7 (29.1)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DWStage IV (100kW/136PS),6-speed automatic transmis-sion

1495.6 (50.4)4.7 (60.1)7.2 (39.2)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DWStage V, 6-speed automatictransmission

1656.2 (45.6)4.9 (57.6)8.4 (33.6)2.2L Duratorq-TDCi - DW(129kW/175PS), 6-speedmanual transmission

1596 (47.1)5 (56.5)7.8 (36.2)2.2L Duratorq-TDCi - DW(147kW/200PS)

148

Fuel and Refuelling

EstateFuel Consumption Figures


Variantg/kml/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)

1707.2 (39.2)5.6 (50.4)10 (28.2)1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCTStage IV (92kW/125PS), 5-speed manual transmission

1566.7 (42.2)5.3 (53.3)9.1 (31)1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCTStage V (88kW/120PS), 5-speed manual transmission

1556.6 (42.8)5.3 (53.3)8.9 (31.7)1.6L EcoBoost(118kW/160PS), 6-speedmanual transmission

1897.9 (35.8)6 (47.1)11.2 (25.2)2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4Stage IV (107kW/145PS)

1848 (35.3)6 (47.1)11.3 (25)2.0L Duratec-HE - MI4Stage V (107kW/145PS)

1767.6 (37.2)6 (47.1)10.4 (27.2)2.0L EcoBoost(149kW/203PS), 6-speedmanual transmission

1767.6 (37.2)6 (47.1)10.4 (27.2)2.0L EcoBoost(177kW/240PS), 6-speedmanual transmission

1797.7 (36.7)6 (47.1)10.7 (26.4)2.0L EcoBoost(149kW/203PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

1797.7 (36.7)6 (47.1)10.9 (26.4)2.0L EcoBoost(177kW/240PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

2239.3 (30.4)6.7 (42.2)13.8 (20.5)2.3L Duratec-HE(118kW/160PS), 6-speedautomatic transmission

149

Fuel and Refuelling


Variantg/kml/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)l/100 km

(mpg)

1294.9 (57.6)4.2 (67.3)6 (47.1)1.6L Duratorq-TDCi(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmissionwithout start-stop

1144.3 (65.7)3.9 (72.4)5 (56.5)1.6L Duratorq-TDCi(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmission withstart-stop ECONETIC

1254.7 (60.1)4.2 (67.3)5.6 (50.4)1.6L Duratorq-TDCi(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmission withstart-stop

1545.8 (48.7)4.8 (58.9)7.5 (37.7)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DWStage IV

1294.9 (57.6)4.2 (67.3)6.1 (46.3)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DWStage V, 6-speed manualtransmission

1395.3 (53.3)4.6 (61.4)6.4 (44.1)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DW(85kW/115PS), 6-speedmanual transmissionECONETIC

1877.1 (39.8)5.5 (51.4)9.7 (29.1)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DWStage IV (100kW/136PS),6-speed automatic transmis-sion

1495.6 (50.4)4.7 (60.1)7.2 (39.2)2.0L Duratorq-TDCi - DWStage V, 6-speed automatictransmission

1656.2 (45.6)4.9 (57.6)8.4 (33.6)2.2L Duratorq-TDCi - DW(129kW/175PS), 6-speedmanual transmission

1596 (47.1)5 (56.5)7.8 (36.2)2.2L Duratorq-TDCi - DW(147kW/200PS)

150

Fuel and Refuelling

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

CAUTIONDo not engage reverse gear when thevehicle is moving. This can causedamage to the transmission.

E99067

On some vehicles it is necessary to raisethe collar whilst selecting reverse gear.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONSelector lever positions

E80836

S

ParkPReverseR

NeutralNDriveDSport mode and manual shiftingS

WARNINGApply the brakes before moving theselector lever and keep them applieduntil you are ready to move off.

Note: A cold engine has a higher idle speed.This will increase the tendency for yourvehicle to creep when you have selected adrive gear.Press the button on the selector lever toselect reverse and park.The selector lever position will be shownin the information display.

Park

WARNINGSSelect park only when your vehicleis stationary.Apply the parking brake andselect park before leaving yourvehicle. Make sure that the selector

lever is latched in position.

Note: An audible warning will sound if youopen the driver's door and you have notselected park.In this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels and the transmissionis locked. You can start the engine with theselector lever in this position.

Reverse

WARNINGSelect reverse only when your vehicleis stationary and the engine is at idlespeed.

151

Transmission

NeutralIn this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels but the transmission isnot locked. You can start the engine withthe selector lever in this position.

DriveSelect drive to shift automatically throughthe forward gears.

Sport mode and manual shifting

2

1

E80837

S

S

Note: A shift will occur only when thevehicle speed and the engine speed areappropriate.Note: When you select position S, a gearchange may occur depending on theaccelerator pedal position in relation toactual vehicle speed.Activate sport mode by moving theselector lever to position S. Sport modewill remain active until you shift manuallyup or down the gears.Select manual shifting to shift manuallythrough the forward gears. Push theselector lever forwards to shift down andpull it backwards to shift up.

Drive modesThe transmission will select theappropriate gear for optimum performancebased on ambient temperature, roadgradient, vehicle load and driver input.

Hints on driving with an automatictransmissionMoving off1. Release the parking brake.2. Release the brake pedal and press the

accelerator pedal.

Stopping1. Release the accelerator pedal and

press the brake pedal.2. Apply the parking brake.

KickdownPress the accelerator pedal fully with theselector lever in the drive position to selectthe next lowest gear for optimumperformance. Release the acceleratorpedal when you no longer requirekickdown.

Emergency park position releaseleverUse the lever to move the selector leverfrom the park position in the event of anelectrical malfunction or if your vehicle hasa flat battery.

152

Transmission

E87934

1. Remove the centre console side panel.

E87935

Note: The lever is yellow.1. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver into

the slot and turn the screwdriverclockwise 90 degrees.

153

Transmission

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONNote: Depending on applicable laws andregulations in the country for which yourvehicle was originally built, the brake lampsmay flash if you brake heavily.Note: Occasional brake noise is normal andoften does not indicate a concern. In normaloperation, the system may emit occasionalor intermittent squeal or groan noises whenthe brakes are applied. Such noises areusually caused by environmental conditionssuch as cold, heat, moisture, road dust, saltor mud.

Disc brakesWet brake discs result in reduced brakingefficiency. Dab the brake pedal whendriving from a car wash to remove the filmof water.

ABSWARNING

The ABS does not relieve you of yourresponsibility to drive with due careand attention.

The ABS helps you to maintain full steeringand directional stability when you brakeheavily in an emergency, by preventing theroad wheels from locking.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITHANTI-LOCK BRAKESNote: When the system is operating, thebrake pedal will pulse and may travelfurther. Maintain pressure on the brakepedal. You may also hear a noise from thesystem. This is normal.

The ABS will not eliminate the risks when:• you drive too close to the vehicle in

front of you• the vehicle is aquaplaning• you take corners too fast• the road surface is poor.

PARKING BRAKE

WARNINGVehicles with an automatictransmission should always be leftwith the selector lever in position P

(Park).

• Press the foot brake pedal firmly.• Pull the parking brake lever up smartly

to its fullest extent.• Do not press the release button while

pulling the lever up.• If your vehicle is parked on a hill and

facing uphill, select first gear or P(Park) and turn the steering wheelaway from the kerb.

• If your vehicle is parked on a hill andfacing downhill, select reverse gear orP (Park) and turn the steering wheeltowards the kerb.

To release the parking brake, press thebrake pedal firmly, pull the lever up slightly,depress the release button and push thelever down.

154

Brakes

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONElectronic stability programme(ESP)

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

E72903

A A

AB

B

B

B

Without ESPAWith ESPB

The system supports stability when thevehicle starts to slide away from yourintended path. This is performed by brakingindividual wheels and reducing enginetorque as needed.The system also provides an enhancedtraction control function by reducingengine torque if the wheels spin when youaccelerate. This improves your ability topull away on slippery roads or loosesurfaces, and improves comfort by limitingwheel spin in hairpin bends.

Stability control (ESP) warning lampWhile driving, it flashes during activationof the system. See Warning Lamps andIndicators (page 81).

Emergency brake assistWARNING


The system will detect when you brakeheavily by measuring the rate at which youpress the brake pedal. It will providemaximum braking efficiency as long as youpress the pedal. The system can reducestopping distances in critical situations.

USING STABILITY CONTROLNote: The system will be switched onautomatically every time you switch theignition on.

Vehicles with stability control(ESP) switch

E71225

Press and hold the switch for one second.The switch will illuminate. A message willbe shown in the display. See InformationMessages (page 98).Press the switch again to turn the systemon.For item location: See At a Glance (page11).

Vehicles without stability control(ESP) switchTurn the system off and on using theinformation display. See InformationDisplays (page 85).

155

Stability Control

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe system makes it easier to pull awaywhen the vehicle is on a slope without theneed to use the parking brake.When the system is active, the vehicle willremain stationary on the slope for a shorttime after you release the brake pedal.During this time, you have time to moveyour foot from the brake to the acceleratorpedal and pull away. The brakes arereleased automatically once the enginehas developed sufficient drive to preventthe vehicle from rolling down the slope.This is an advantage when pulling awayon a slope, for example from a car parkramp, traffic lights or when reversing uphillinto a parking space.

WARNINGThe system does not replace theparking brake. When you leave thevehicle, always apply the parking

brake and select first or reverse gear.

USING HILL START ASSISTThe system can operate in eitherautomatic or manual mode. If you selectautomatic mode, the system is activatedautomatically when the vehicle is on aslope and you press the brake pedal. If youselect manual mode, you must activatethe system using the brake pedal.To set the system mode:

E70499

E74629

AutoOff

Hill Launch

Manual


2. Highlight Setup with the up and downbuttons and press the right arrowbutton.

3. Highlight Hill Launch and press theright arrow button.

4. Highlight the desired setting and pressthe OK button to confirm the setting.If Off is selected, the system isswitched off and cannot be activatedeither automatically or manually.

5. Press the left arrow button to exit themenu. To return to the trip computerdisplay directly, hold the left arrowbutton pressed.

156

Hill Start Assist

Note: When the system is in manualactivation mode, only use the system whenpulling away uphill on gradients greater than3%. If the vehicle is on the flat or on adownhill slope, an active system will makeit difficult to pull away smoothly.

Activating the systemWARNINGS

You must remain in the vehicle onceyou have activated the system. Anyattempt to leave the vehicle will

deactivate the system automatically.The system is active only if themessage Hill Launch Assist activeis displayed in the information

display. During all times you areresponsible for controlling the vehicle,supervising the system and intervening, ifrequired.

You can activate the system only if thefollowing conditions have been met:• The engine is running.• The system is switched on (automatic

or manual mode).• The parking brake is fully disengaged.• On vehicles with manual transmission,

the clutch pedal is pressed.• On vehicles with automatic

transmission, the driver door is closed.• No failure mode is present.To activate the system in automatic mode:1. Press the brake pedal to bring the

vehicle to a complete standstill. Keepthe brake pedal depressed.

2. If the sensors detect that the vehicle ison a slope and the right drivingdirection is selected (first gear if thevehicle is pointing uphill, reverse gearif the vehicle is pointing downhill), thesystem will be activated automatically.Hill Launch Assist active will appearin the display.

3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, the vehicle will remain onthe slope without rolling away forapproximately two to three seconds.

4. Pull away using the accelerator andclutch pedal. The brakes will bereleased automatically.

To activate the system in manual mode:1. Press the brake pedal to bring the

vehicle to a complete standstill. Keepthe brake pedal depressed.

2. Quickly jab the brake pedal further untilHill Launch Assist active appears inthe display. The system is now active.

3. When you remove your foot from thebrake pedal, the vehicle will remain onthe slope without rolling away forapproximately two to three seconds.

4. Pull away using the accelerator andclutch pedal. The brakes will bereleased automatically.

WARNINGWhen the system is active and thesystem detects a failure, the systemis deactivated and the message

Please use park brake! followed by HillLaunch A .not available will be displayed.The vehicle is still safe to be driven and canbe repaired during the next service. Themessage Hill Launch A. not availablewill also be displayed with manualactivation during a failure or if one of theactivation criteria is not met. If you haveswitched the system off, no messages willbe displayed.

157

Hill Start Assist

Deactivating the systemTo deactivate the system, perform one ofthe following:• Apply the parking brake.• Wait for two to three seconds until the

system deactivates automatically.• If a forward gear was selected when

the system became active, selectreverse gear.

• If reverse gear was selected when thesystem became active, select aforward gear.

Hill Launch Assist off will appear in theinstrument cluster display.

158

Hill Start Assist

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe active suspension provides improvedhandling, comfort and stability bycontinuously adjusting the damperproperties to the current road and drivingconditions. This system in conjunction withthe ABS system offers the benefit ofpotentially shorter stopping distances onrough road surfaces.Depending on your preferences and drivingstyle, you can choose between threedifferent settings:

ComfortThis provides a softer driving feel.

NormalNormal setting.

SportThis provides a harder, sportier ride.

USING ACTIVE SUSPENSIONSelecting a settingNote: After you select a setting, you maynot immediately notice a difference in thevehicle's handling. The effect of thecontinuously controlled damping dependson the road surface and driving conditions.

E70475

You can change the setting while driving.

System malfunctionThe active suspension system will switchoff automatically if it malfunctions. Thesuspension will be set to a fail-safecondition that will enable you to continuedriving but you will not be able to changethe suspension setting. Have this checkedas soon as possible.

159

Active suspension


WARNINGThe parking aid does not relieve youof your responsibility to drive withdue care and attention.

CAUTIONSVehicles fitted with a trailer towmodule not approved by us may notcorrectly detect obstacles.The sensors may not detect objectsin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.The sensors may not detect objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonicwaves.The parking aid does not detectobstacles moving away from thevehicle. They will only be detected

shortly after they start to move towardsthe vehicle again.

Take particular care when reversingwith a tow ball arm or rear fittedaccessories e.g. a bicycle carrier, as

the rear parking aid will only indicate thedistance from the bumper to the obstacle.

If you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray thesensors briefly from a distance not

less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).

Note: On vehicles fitted with a tow ballarm, the parking aid is deactivatedautomatically when any trailer lamps (orlighting boards) are connected to the 13-pinsocket via a trailer tow module we haveapproved.Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, iceand snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.

Note: The parking aid may emit false tonesif it detects a signal using the samefrequency as the sensors or if the vehicle isfully laden.Note: The outer sensors may detect theside walls of a garage. If the distancebetween the outer sensor and the side wallremains constant for three seconds, thetone will switch off. As you continue, theinner sensors will detect rearward objects.

PARKING AIDSwitching the parking aid on andoffNote: The parking aid switches offautomatically when you start the engine orwhen you exceed 16 km/h (10 mph).Note: The front and rear sensors are alwaysactivated or deactivated together.The parking aid is per default off. To switchthe parking aid on, press the switch in theinstrument panel or select reverse gear.The light in the switch illuminates whenthe parking aid is activated.To turn it off, press the switch again.

Manoeuvring with the parking aid

E72902

Note: If a high pitch warning tone soundsfor three seconds and the light in the switchis flashing, it indicates a malfunction. Thesystem will be disabled. Have the systemchecked by properly trained technicians.

160

Parking Aids

You will hear an intermittent tone at adistance of up to approximately 150centimetres (59 inches) between theobstacle and rear bumper, 80 centimetres(31 inches) between the obstacle and frontbumper and 50 centimetres (20 inches)to the side. Decreasing the distanceaccelerates the intermittent tone. Acontinuous tone will start at a distance ofless than 30 centimetres (12 inches).You will hear an alternating tone from thefront and rear if obstacles are closer than30 centimetres (12 inches) to the front andrear bumpers.

161

Parking Aids

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONThe camera is a visual aid for use whenreversing.

WARNINGThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.

CAUTIONSIf you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray thecamera briefly from a distance not

less than 20 centimetres (8 inches).Do not apply pressure to the camera.

Note: Keep the camera free from dirt, iceand snow. Do not clean with sharp objects,degreaser, wax or organic products. Use onlya soft cloth.During operation, guide lines appear in thedisplay which represent your vehicle's pathand approximate distance from rearwardobjects.

REAR VIEW CAMERA

WARNINGSThe operation of the camera mayvary depending on the ambienttemperature, vehicle and road

conditions.The distances shown in the displaymay differ from the actual distance.Do not place objects in front of thecamera.

The camera is located on the luggagecompartment lid near the handle.

E99105

Activating the rear view cameraCAUTION

The camera may not detect objectsthat are close to the vehicle.

With the ignition and the audio unitswitched on, engage reverse gear. Theimage is displayed on the screen.The camera may not operate correctly inthe following conditions:• Dark areas.• Intense light.• If the ambient temperature increases

or decreases rapidly.• If the camera is wet, for example in rain

or high humidity.• If the camera's view is obstructed, for

example by mud.

Using the displayCAUTIONS

Obstacles above the camera positionwill not be shown. Inspect the areabehind your vehicle if necessary.

162

Rear view camera

CAUTIONSMarks are for general guidance only,and are calculated for vehicles inmaximum load conditions on an even

road surface.

The lines show a projected vehicle path(based on the current steering wheelangle) and the distance from the exteriormirrors and rear bumper.

E99458

A

B

C

D E

A

B

C

D

Exterior mirror clearance - 0.1metre (4 inches)

A

Red - 0.3 metre (12 inches)BAmber - 1 metre (39 inches)C

163

Rear view camera

Amber - 2 metres (79 inches)DAmber - centre line of theprojected vehicle path

E

Note: When reversing with a trailer, the lineson the screen show the vehicle direction andnot the trailer.

Deactivating the rear view cameraNote: Disengage reverse gear. The displaywill stay on for a short period beforeswitching off.The system will automatically switch offonce the vehicle speed has reachedapproximately 15 km/h (9 mph).

Vehicles with parking aidThe display will additionally show acoloured distance bar. This guide indicatesthe distance from the rear bumper to thedetected obstacle.These are colour coded as follows:• Green - 0.8 to 1.5 metres (31 to 59

inches).• Amber - 0.3 to 0.8 metre (12 to 31

inches).• Red - 0.3 metre (12 inches) or less.

164

Rear view camera

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATIONCruise control allows you to control yourspeed using the switches on the steeringwheel. You can use cruise control whenyou exceed 30 km/h (20 mph).

USING CRUISE CONTROL

WARNINGDo not use cruise control in heavytraffic, on twisty roads or when theroad surface is slippery.

Switching cruise control on

E70612

Setting a speed

E70615

Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switchto store and maintain your current speed.The cruise control indicator illuminates.

Changing the set speedWARNING

When you are going downhill, yourspeed may increase above the setspeed. The system will not apply the

brakes. Change down a gear and press theRES switch to assist the system inmaintaining the set speed.

Note: If you accelerate by pressing theaccelerator pedal, the set speed will notchange. When you release the acceleratorpedal, you will return to the speed that youpreviously set.Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switchto accelerate or decelerate.

Cancelling the set speed

E70614

Press the brake pedal or the CAN switch.The system will no longer control yourspeed. The cruise control indicator will gooff but the system will retain the speedthat you previously set.

165

Cruise Control

Resuming the set speed

E70616

Press the RES switch. The cruise controlindicator illuminates and the system willattempt to resume the speed that youpreviously set.

Switching cruise control off

E70613

Press the OFF switch. The system will notretain the speed that you previously set.The cruise control indicator will go off.

166

Cruise Control


WARNINGSThe system is not a collision warningor avoidance system. The separateforward alert function provides a

collision warning and mitigation feature.See Forward alert function (page 172).You must intervene if the system does notdetect a vehicle in front.

When driving you are responsible formaintaining the correct distance andspeed, even when adaptive cruise

control is used. You must always payattention to the traffic conditions andintervene when adaptive cruise control isnot maintaining a suitable speed orsuitable distance.

The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.The system does not brake for slowor stationary vehicles, pedestrians,objects in the road, oncoming and

crossing vehicles.

CAUTIONSOnly use adaptive cruise control whenconditions are favourable, for exampleon motorways and main roads with

steady free flowing traffic.Do not use in poor visibility,specifically fog, heavy rain, spray orsnow.Do not use on icy or slippery roads.

Do not use the system when enteringor leaving a motorway.The radar sensor has a limited field ofvision. In some situations it maydetect a vehicle other than the one

expected or not detect any vehicle at all.

Note: When adaptive cruise control isactivated, you may hear some unusualsounds during automatic braking. This isnormal and caused by the automaticbraking system.Note: Keep the front of the vehicle freefrom dirt, metal badges or objects, includingvehicle front protectors and additional lightswhich may prevent the sensor fromoperating.The system is designed to help youmaintain a gap from the vehicle ahead ora set road speed if there is no slowervehicle ahead. The system is intended toprovide enhanced operation of the vehiclewhen following other vehicles which are inthe same lane and travelling in the samedirection.The system is based on the use of a radarsensor which projects a beam directlyforward of the vehicle. This beam willdetect any vehicle ahead within thesystem's range.The radar sensor is mounted behind thefront grille.

167

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)

Detection beam issues

E71621

Detection issues can occur:• With vehicles that edge into your lane

that can only be detected once theyhave moved fully into your lane (A).Motorcycles may be detected late, ornot at all. (B)

• With vehicles in front when going intoand coming out of a bend (C). Thedetection beam will not follow sharpcurves in the road.

In these cases the system may brake lateor unexpectedly. You should stay alert andintervene if necessary.

Automatic braking with ACCWARNINGS

You must take immediate actiononce alerted, as the adaptive cruisecontrol braking will not be sufficient

to keep a safe distance to the vehicle infront.

In some cases there may be nowarning or the warning may bedelayed. You should always apply

the brakes when necessary.When following a vehicle in front ofyou, adaptive cruise control will notautomatically decelerate to a stop.

The system will automatically brake foryou, if required to maintain the set gapbetween your vehicle and the one detectedin front. This braking capacity is limited toapproximately 30% of the total manualbraking capacity to ensure smooth andcomfortable cruising. If the car needs tobrake more heavily than this, and you donot intervene by braking manually, analarm will sound and a warning symbol willbe displayed in the cluster.

USING ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROLThe system is operated by adjustmentcontrols mounted on the steering wheel.

168


Vehicles without speed limiter

E124908

A

C

E

D

B

ACC onAACC cancelBACC offCACC gap increaseDACC gap decreaseE

Vehicles with speed limiter

E124909

A

C

E

D

B

ACC on/offAACC cancelBSpeed limiter on/offC

ACC gap increaseDACC gap decreaseE

Switching the system onPress switch A. The system is set tostandby mode.

Setting a speedNote: The system must be in standbymode.

E133884

F

G

Set speed increaseFSet speed decreaseG

Press switch F or switch G to select yourdesired cruise speed. The speed isdisplayed in the information display andstored as the set speed.

Changing the set speedNote: Vehicle speed may be increased anddecreased at intervals of 5 km/h or 5 mph.Note: If the system does not react to thesechanges the reason may be that the gapinterval to the vehicle in front prevents anincrease in speed.

169


E133884

F

G

Press switch F to increase or switch G todecrease the set speed until the desiredset speed is shown in the informationdisplay. The vehicle speed will graduallychange to the selected speed.Note: Smaller increases of 1 km/h or 1 mphmay be set by pressing switch H.

E133885

H

ACC resumeH

Setting the vehicle gapCAUTION

Use the appropriate gap setting inaccordance with local trafficregulations.

Note: The gap setting is time dependantand therefore the distance willautomatically adjust with your speed. Forexample on a gap setting of four bars, thetime gap is 1.8 seconds. This will mean thatat a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph), thedistance to the vehicle in front will bemaintained at 50 metres (164 feet).Note: If the accelerator is depressed for ashort period, for example when overtaking,the system is temporarily deactivated andthen reactivated when the accelerator pedalis released. A message is displayed in theinformation display.Note: The gap setting will remainunchanged during ignition cycles.

E82311

The distance between you and the vehicledetected in front is maintained by avariable setting. There are five steps whichare represented by horizontal barsdisplayed in the information display. Onebar denotes the smallest gap and five barsindicate the largest gap. These bars areshown empty when in standby mode andfilled when in active mode.If no vehicle is detected in front, then onlyyour vehicle is displayed in the informationdisplay below the bars. The system willmaintain the set speed when conditionspermit. The set gap is maintained anddisplayed.If a vehicle is detected by the sensor, thedisplay will show another vehicle abovethe horizontal bars:

170


E82312

This is a follow mode, and the system willaccelerate or decelerate as necessary tomaintain the set gap.Press switch E to decrease the gap orswitch D to increase the gap. The gapselected will be represented by the numberof bars in the display.Note: The recommended gap setting is fourto five bars.

Temporarily deactivating thesystemNote: The system is cancelled when thegear lever is moved to a neutral position orif the accelerator pedal or clutch isdepressed for a long period of timePress either the brake or switch B to cancelthe system. The system will return tostandby mode allowing you full manualcontrol of the vehicle. The set speed andgap setting are retained in the memory.To resume adaptive cruise control pressswitch H. The system will resume with thepreviously set speed and vehicle gapsetting if conditions permit.

Switching the system offVehicles without speed limiterPress switch C to turn the system off.Note: When deactivating the system bypressing switch C, the stored speed is notretained.

Vehicles with speed limiterPress switch A to turn the system off.Note: When deactivating the system bypressing switch A, the stored speed is notretained.

Automatic deactivationNote: If the engine speed drops too low, amessage is displayed in the informationdisplay instructing you to change down agear (manual transmission only). If you donot follow this recommendation then thesystem will go into automatic deactivationmode.Note: The system will not operate if theelectronic stability programme (ESP) hasbeen manually switched off.The system is dependent on various othersafety systems, for example ABS and ESP.If any of these systems are malfunctioningor reacting to an emergency, the system isautomatically deactivated.In the event of automatic deactivation asignal will sound and the message isdisplayed in the information display SeeInformation Messages (page 98). Youmust then intervene and adapt your drivingand speed to vehicles in front.An automatic deactivation can be due tothe:• vehicle speed falling below 30 km/h

(20 mph)• wheels losing traction• brake temperature is high, for example

when driving on mountainous or hillyroads

• engine speed is too low• radar sensor is covered• parking brake or electric parking brake

(EPB) is applied.

171


FORWARD ALERT FUNCTION

WARNINGSNever wait for a collision warning.When driving you are responsible formaintaining the correct distance and

speed, even when the system is used.The system will only react to vehiclesin front travelling in the samedirection and will not react to slow

or stationary vehicles.Never drive in a manner to provokethe system. The system is designedto assist in emergencies only.

CAUTIONSWarnings may be triggered late, beabsent or triggered unnecessarily dueto detection beam issues. See

Principle of Operation (page 167).The system uses the same radarsensors as adaptive cruise control andtherefore has the same limitations.

See Principle of Operation (page 167).

Note: The brake support system onlyreduces the collision speed if you brakeimmediately once alerted.Note: If the brake pedal is depressedsufficiently quickly then braking isimplemented with full brake function, evenif the force on the pedal is light.Note: Brake support prepares the brakesystem for rapid braking and the brakes areapplied gently, which may be noticed as aslight jerk.Note: The collision alerts will only occur ifthe system is switched on, however thebrake support is always on and cannot beturned off.Note: The system may be used with orwithout the Adaptive cruise control systembeing activated.

The system assists you by warning of therisk of a collision with a vehicle in front.The system alerts you by warning chimesand a visual warning in the informationdisplay. See Information Messages(page 98).Brake support is activated to enable fullbraking effectiveness, and reduce theseverity of a collision with the vehicle infront.

Switching the system on and offNote: When the system is switched off, awarning indicator will remain illuminated inthe information display. See WarningLamps and Indicators (page 81).Note: The system status and settings willremain unchanged during ignition cycles.The system can be switched on and offusing the information display. See GeneralInformation (page 85).

Adjusting the warning sensitivityYou may adjust the system warningsensitivity using the buttons on the steeringwheel. See General Information (page85). This controls how early the visual andaudible warning is activated.

172



WARNINGWhen you are going downhill, yourspeed may increase above the setspeed. The system will not apply the

brakes but a warning will be given.

The system allows you to set a speed, towhich the vehicle then becomes limited.The set speed will become the effectivemaximum speed of the vehicle, but withthe option to temporarily exceed this limitif required.

USING THE SPEED LIMITERThe system is operated by adjustmentcontrols mounted on the steering wheel.Press button A to switch the system onand off. The information display willprompt for a speed to be set.Note: The set speed limit can beintentionally exceeded for a short period ifrequired, for example when overtaking.

E124874

A

B

Setting the speed limitUse the cruise control switches to alter themaximum speed setting.

E70615

Press the SET+ switch or the SET- switchto select your desired speed limit. Thespeed is indicated in the informationdisplay and stored as the set speed.Press button B to cancel the limiter andplace it in standby mode. The informationdisplay will confirm deactivation byshowing the set speed crossed out.

E70616

Press the RES button to resume thelimiter. The information display will confirmthe system is active by showing the setspeed again.

Intentionally exceeding the speedlimitDepress the accelerator hard close to thefull pedal travel and the limit willtemporarily deactivate. The system willreactivate once the vehicle speed dropsbelow the set speed.

173

Speed Limiter

System warningsIf the set limit is accidentally exceeded theinformation display will show the set speedflashing together with an audible warningchime.If the set limit is intentionally exceeded theinformation display will show the set speedcrossed out.

174

Speed Limiter


WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if

required.If the sensor becomes blocked thesystem may not function.Take regular rest breaks as requiredand do not wait for the system towarn you if you feel tired.Take rest breaks only where it is safeto do so.Certain driving styles and behaviourmay result in the system issuing awarning even if you are not feeling

tired.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weather conditionsthe system may not function. Rain,snow, spray and large contrasts in

lighting can all influence the sensor.The system will not operate if thesensor cannot track the road lanemarkings.The system may not operate in areasduring roadworks construction.The system may not operate on roadswith sharp bends or narrow lanes.Do not carry out windscreen repairs inthe immediate area surrounding thesensor.If your vehicle is fitted with asuspension kit not approved by us, thesystem may not function correctly.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings, insectsand snow or ice.Note: The system is intended as a driver aidwhen driving on fast main roads andmotorways.Note: The system calculates an alertnesslevel at vehicle speeds above approximately65 km/h (40 mph).The system automatically monitors yourdriving behaviour using various inputsincluding the front camera sensor.If the system detects that you arebecoming drowsy or there is a deteriorationin your driving, the system will alert you.

USING DRIVER ALERTSwitching the system on and offNote: The system status will remainunchanged during ignition cycles.Activate the system using the informationdisplay. See Information Displays (page85).Once activated the system will calculateyour alertness level based upon yourdriving behaviour in relation to the lanemarkings, and other factors.

System warningsNote: The system will not issue warningsbelow approximately 65 km/h (40 mph).The warning system is in two stages. Atfirst the system issues a temporary warningthat a rest should be taken. This messagewill only appear for a short time. If a rest isnot then taken a further warning may beissued which will remain in the informationdisplay until cancelled. See InformationMessages (page 98).Press OK on the steering wheel control toremove the warning.

175

Driver Alert

System displayWhen active the system will runautomatically in the background and onlyissue warnings if required. You can viewthe status at any time using theinformation display. See GeneralInformation (page 85).The alertness level is shown by six stepsas a coloured bar.

E131358

Alertness level is fine, no rest required.

E131359

Alertness level is critical, indicating that arest should be taken as soon as safelypossible.The status bar will travel from left to rightas the calculated alertness leveldecreases. As the rest icon is approachedthe colour turns from green to yellow andthen finally red when a rest break must betaken.• Green - No rest required.• Yellow - First (temporary) warning.• Red - Second warning.Note: The alertness level will be shown ingrey if the camera sensor cannot track theroad lane markings or if the vehicle speeddrops below approximately 65 km/h (40mph).

Resetting the systemYou can reset the system by either:• Switching the ignition off and on.• Stopping the vehicle and then opening

and closing the driver's door.

176

Driver Alert


WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.At all times you are responsible forcontrolling the vehicle, supervisingthe system and intervening if

required.If the sensor becomes blocked thesystem may not function.Lane markings may not always beproperly tracked by the sensor. Otherstructures or objects may sometimes

be incorrectly detected as a lane marking,resulting in a false or missed warning.

CAUTIONSIn cold and severe weather conditionsthe system may not function. Rain,snow, spray and large contrasts in

lighting can all influence the sensor.The system will not operate if thesensor cannot track the road lanemarkings.The system may not operate in areasduring roadworks construction.The system may not operate on roadswith sharp bends or narrow lanes.Do not carry out windscreen repairs inthe immediate area surrounding thesensor.If your vehicle is fitted with asuspension kit not approved by us, thesystem may not function correctly.

Note: Keep the windscreen free fromobstructions such as bird droppings, insectsand snow or ice.

Note: The system is intended as a driver aidwhen driving on fast main roads andmotorways.Note: The system may not operate duringhard braking or acceleration and, when youare intentionally steering the vehicle.Note: The system will operate with aminimum of one tracked lane marking.Note: The system will only operate abovevehicle speeds of approximately 65 km/h(40 mph).A sensor is mounted behind the interiorrear view mirror. It continuously monitorsconditions to alert you of unintentionallane drifting at high speeds.The system will automatically detect andtrack the lane markings on the road. If itdetects that the vehicle is unintentionallydrifting towards the lane boundaries thena visual warning will be displayed in theinformation display. There is also a warninggiven in the form of a vibration felt throughthe steering wheel.

USING LANE DEPARTUREWARNINGSwitching the system on and offNote: When the system is switched off, awarning indicator will remain illuminated inthe information display. See WarningLamps and Indicators (page 81).Note: The system status and settings willremain unchanged during ignition cycles.

177

Lane Departure Warning

E131360

A

B

System onASystem offB

Activate the system using the switches onthe indicator stalk.

Setting the steering wheelvibration levelThe system has three intensity levels whichcan be set using the information display.See General Information (page 85).

Setting the system sensitivityYou can adjust how quickly the systemwarns you of a dangerous situation. Thesystem has two sensitivity levels which canbe set using the information display. SeeGeneral Information (page 85).

System warnings

E131363

A column of lane markings is displayedeither side of the vehicle graphic.

The lane markings are colour coded asfollows:• Green - The system is ready to warn

you of any unintentional lanedeparture.

• Red - The vehicle is approaching or istoo close to the detected laneboundary. Take immediate safe actionto reposition the vehicle.

• Grey - The relevant lane boundary willbe suppressed.

Instances where a lane boundary may besuppressed:• Lane markings on the road may not be

detected by the sensor.• The direction indicator for that side of

the vehicle is on.• During hard acceleration and braking,

or if direct steering is applied.• Vehicle speed is outside the operating

limits• If there is an ABS or Stability Control

(ESP) intervention.• Narrow lane width.If the lane markings turn red or a vibrationis felt through the steering wheel you musttake immediate and safe action to alignthe vehicle and correct any unintendedlane drift.

178

Lane Departure Warning

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGSUse load securing straps to anapproved standard, e.g. DIN.Make sure that you secure all looseitems properly.Place luggage and other loads as lowand as far forward as possible withinthe luggage or loadspace.Do not drive with the tailgate or reardoor open. Exhaust fumes may enterthe vehicle.Do not exceed the maximum frontand rear axle loads for your vehicle.See Vehicle identification (page

244).Heavy loads, when placed in thepassenger compartment, should beon folded rear seats as shown. See

Rear Seats (page 124).

CAUTIONSDo not allow items to contact the rearwindows.Do not use any abrasive materials toclean the interior of the rear windows.Do not install stickers or labels to theinterior of the rear windows.

E97377

LUGGAGE ANCHOR POINTSEstate

E86912

179

Load Carrying

4-door and 5-door

E86913

SLIDING LOADSPACE FLOOR

WARNINGDo not slide the loadspace floorrearwards when the vehicle isstanding on an incline of 15 degrees

or more and facing uphill.

CAUTIONThe maximum permissible weight onthe sliding loadspace floor is 200kilogrammes (441 pounds).

The maximum permissible weight on theend of the sliding loadspace floor whenthe floor is in the fully extended position(slid outside the luggage compartment)is 120 kilogrammes (265 pounds).

E74810

Press the unlocking handle and pull theloadspace floor rearwards. It will stop andengage at a midway position.

E74811

To slide it out fully, press the unlockinghandle again and pull it out until it engagesin the end position.To slide it forwards, press the unlockinghandle and push it forwards.Note: You do not have to exert as muchpressure on the unlocking handle if you pushthe loadspace floor forwards slightly whenoperating it.

180

Load Carrying

Storage compartmentA storage compartment is located in thefloor at the rear of the luggagecompartment.To gain access to the storagecompartment, lift up the sliding loadspacefloor as follows:

E74812

1

2

E74813

3

1. Press the unlocking handle and pull theloadspace floor rearwards a short way.

2. Lift up the rear of the floor (1).3. Push the floor forwards until it engages

at the front (2).4. Release the support leg from the clip

on the underside of the floor.5. Insert the end into the square retainer

in the left-hand rail (3).6. Lift the storage compartment cover

using the loop.To return the loadspace floor to the normalposition:1. Hold the floor with one hand and

release the support leg with the otherhand.

2. Insert the support leg back into the clip.

181

Load Carrying

3. Lower the floor.4. Press the unlocking handle and pull the

loadspace floor rearwards until it dropsinto position on the rails.

REAR UNDER FLOORSTORAGEVehicles with a sliding loadspacefloorRaise the loadspace floor to gain accessto the storage compartment. See SlidingLoadspace Floor (page 180).

Vehicles without a slidingloadspace floor

E87689

LUGGAGE COVERS

WARNINGDo not place objects on the luggagecover.

E112571

Pull out the cover until it locks.

E112572

Release it from the retaining points bypressing below the handle. Let it roll slowlyback into the case.

182

Load Carrying

E112588

To remove or install the cover, push eitherend of the case inwards.

Stowing the luggage cover - Estatewithout full size spare wheel

E134798

Space is provided under the luggagecompartment floor.

CARGO NETSLuggage retention netInstalling the net

E87052

1. Push the ends of the upper bar towardseach other and insert them into theretainers on the roof. Push the barforwards into the narrow section of theretainers.

E87053

2. Attach the net to the luggage anchorpoints. See Luggage Anchor Points(page 179).

183

Load Carrying

E87054

3. Tighten the belts.

Removing the net

E87135

1. Release the belts.2. Remove the net from the luggage

anchor points.3. Remove the upper bars.

ROOF RACKS AND LOADCARRIERSRoof rack

WARNINGSIf you use a roof rack, the fuelconsumption of your vehicle will behigher and you may experience

different driving characteristics.Read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when you are fitting aroof rack.

CAUTIONDo not exceed the maximumpermissible roof load of 75kilogrammes (165 pounds) (including

the roof rack).

Check the security of the roof rack andtighten its fittings as follows:• before starting• after driving 50 kilometres (30 miles)• at 1 000 kilometres (600 miles)

intervals.To minimise windnoise when the roof rackis not in use, cross rails should be movedrearwards and placed together. To reducefuel consumption, cross rails should beremoved when not in use.

DOG GUARD

CAUTIONKeep a distance of at least onecentimetre between the dog guardand the seats in front of it.

184

Load Carrying

Installing behind the front seats

E86848

1. Push the ends of the bar on the grilletowards each other and insert theminto the retainers on the roof. Push thebar forwards into the narrow sectionof the retainers.

E87782

2. Attach the dog guard to the loweranchor points. Do not tighten thescrews.

E87783

3. Attach the grille to the lower bar withthe handwheels. Do not tighten thehandwheels.

4. Tighten the screws at the lower anchorpoints.

5. Tighten the handwheels.

Installing behind the rear seats

E86848

185

Load Carrying

1. Push the ends of the bar on the grilletowards each other and insert theminto the retainers on the roof. Push thebar forwards into the narrow sectionof the retainers.

E104424

2. Remove two screws from both theluggage anchor points. See LuggageAnchor Points (page 179).

3. Attach the lower bar to the grille withthe handwheels. Do not tighten thehandwheels.

4. Attach the dog guard lower bar to theluggage anchor points, secure with thenew supplied screws.

5. Tighten the handwheels.Remove in the reverse order.

LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES

WARNINGDo not exceed the maximumpermissible load of 60 kilogrammes(132 pounds) on two load retaining

fixtures and 30 kilogrammes (66 pounds)on one.

Check the security of the load retainingfixtures and tighten its fittings as follows:• before starting• after driving 50 kilometres (30 miles)• at 1 000 kilometres (600 miles)

intervals.

Installing the load retainingfixtures

E75003

186

Load Carrying

Installing the load bracketWARNINGS

Install the load bracket with thelongest section towards the rear ofthe vehicle. If you install it the wrong

way round, it may not hold the box in placein the event of an accident.

Do not exceed the maximumpermissible load of 20 kilogrammes(44 pounds).

1

23 3

E76378

1. Turn the box over.2. Position the load bracket.3. Secure the load bracket with four

screws.

E76379

4. Slide the captured bolts onto the loadretaining fixture.

E76380

5. Secure the load bracket with the twowing nuts.

6. Remove in the reverse order.

187

Load Carrying

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNINGSDo not exceed 100 km/h (62 mph).

The rear tyre pressures must beincreased by 0.2 bar (3 psi) abovespecification. See Technical

Specifications (page 240).Do not exceed the maximum grosstrain weight stated on the vehicleidentification plate. See Vehicle

identification (page 244).

CAUTIONDo not exceed the maximumpermissible nose weight, i.e. verticalweight on the tow ball, of 90

kilogrammes (198 pounds).

Note: Not all vehicles are suitable orapproved to have tow bars fitted. Checkwith your dealer first.Place loads as low and central to theaxle(s) of the trailer as possible. If you aretowing with an unladen vehicle, the loadin the trailer should be placed toward thenose, within the maximum nose load, asthis gives the best stability.The stability of the vehicle to trailercombination is very much dependant onthe quality of the trailer.In high altitude regions above 1 000 metres(3 281 feet), the stipulated maximumpermitted gross train weight must bereduced by 10% for every additional 1 000metres (3 281 feet).

Steep gradientsWARNING

The overrun brake on a trailer is notcontrolled by ABS.

Change down a gear before you reach asteep downhill gradient.

TOW BALL

WARNINGSWhen not in use, always transportthe tow ball arm securely fastenedin the luggage compartment.Take special care when fitting thetow ball arm as the safety of thevehicle and the trailer depends on

this.Do not use any tools for mounting ordismounting the tow ball arm. Do notmodify the trailer coupling. Do not

disassemble or repair the tow ball arm.

E71328

A 13-pin trailer socket and the tow ball armseat are provided underneath the rearbumper. Turn the trailer socket downthrough 90 degrees until it engages in theend position.

188

Towing

Unlocking the tow ball armmechanism

E713292

1

3

1. Remove the protecting cap (1). Insertthe key and turn it clockwise to unlock(2).

2. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull thehandwheel out and turn it clockwiseuntil it clicks (3).

3. The red mark on the handwheel mustalign with the green mark on the towball.

4. Release the handwheel. The tow ballarm is unlocked.

Inserting the tow ball arm

1

2E71330

WARNINGThe tow ball arm may only beinserted when completely unlocked.

1. Pull out the plug.2. Insert the tow ball arm vertically and

press it upwards until it engages (1).Do not hold your hand near thehandwheel.

3. The green mark on the handwheelmust align with the green mark on thetow ball.

4. To lock, turn the key anti-clockwise andremove the key (2).

5. Pull the protecting cap from the keybow and press it onto the lock.

189

Towing

Driving with a trailer

E71331

A

B

WARNINGIf any of the below conditions cannotbe met, do not use the tow bar andhave it checked by a properly trained

technician.

Before starting your journey, make surethat the tow ball arm is properly locked.Check that:• the green marks are aligned• the handwheel (A) is correctly fitted

to the tow ball arm• you have removed the key (B)• the tow ball arm is securely positioned.

It must not move when jerked.

Removing the tow ball arm

3

1E71332

2

1. Unhitch the trailer.2. Remove the protecting cap. Press the

cap into the key bow. Insert the key andunlock (1).

3. Hold the tow ball arm. Pull thehandwheel out, turn it clockwiseagainst the stop (2) and remove thetow ball arm (3).

4. Release the handwheel.When unlocked in this way, the tow ballarm can be reinserted at any time.

190

Towing

Driving without a trailer

E94771

1

1. Remove the tow ball arm.2. Insert the plug into its seat (1).

WARNINGNever unlock the tow ball arm withthe trailer attached.

MaintenanceWARNING

Remove the tow ball arm andprotect the seat with the plug beforesteam cleaning your vehicle.

Keep the system clean. Periodicallylubricate bearings, sliding surfaces, andlocking balls with resin-free grease or oiland the lock with graphite.In case of loss, replacement keys areavailable from the manufacturer by statingthe number on the lock cylinder.

191

Towing

RUNNING-INTyres

WARNINGNew tyres need to be run-in forapproximately 500 kilometres (300miles). During this time, you may

experience different driving characteristics.

Brakes and clutchWARNING

Avoid heavy use of the brakes andclutch if possible for the first 150kilometres (100 miles) in town and

for the first 1500 kilometres (1000 miles)on motorways.

EngineCAUTION

Avoid driving too fast during the first1500 kilometres (1000 miles). Varyyour speed frequently and change up

through the gears early. Do not labour theengine.

GENERAL DRIVING POINTS -VEHICLES WITH: SPORTSSUSPENSIONThe distance between the underside ofyour vehicle and the ground is reducedcompared to other models. Drive withextreme care to avoid damage to yourvehicle.

COLD WEATHERPRECAUTIONSThe functional operation of somecomponents and systems can be affectedat temperatures below -30°C (-22°F).

DRIVING THROUGH WATERDriving through water

CAUTIONSDrive through water in an emergencyonly, and not as part of normal driving.Engine damage can occur if waterenters the air filter.

In an emergency, the vehicle can be driventhrough water to a maximum depth of 200millimetres (8 inches) and at a maximumspeed of 10 km/h (6 mph). Extra cautionshould be exercised when driving throughflowing water.When driving in water, maintain a lowspeed and do not stop the vehicle. Afterdriving through water, and as soon as it issafe to do so:• Depress the brake pedal lightly and

check that full brake function isachieved.

• Check that the horn works.• Check that the vehicle's lights are fully

operational.• Check the power assistance

of the steering system.

192

Driving Hints

FIRST AID KITSpace is provided in the luggagecompartment.4-door

E87654

5-door

E87655

Estate

E87656

WARNING TRIANGLE4-door and 5-door

E87657

Space is provided in the luggagecompartment.

Estate and vehicles with tyre repairkitSpace is provided under the carpet.See Rear Under Floor Storage (page 182).

193

Roadside Emergencies

FUSE BOX LOCATIONSEngine compartment fuse box

E72588

Central fuse boxAll vehicles

E72589

1. Pinch the retaining clips to release thecover.

E72590

2. Remove the cover.3. Turn the knob through 90 degrees andrelease the fuse box from the retainingbracket.4. Lower the fuse box cover and pull ittowards you.5. Install in the reverse order.

Rear fuse box - 4-door and 5-door

1

E87481

1. Remove the cover.

194

Fuses

2

E87482

2. Remove the relevant fuse box cover.

Rear fuse box - Estate

1

2

E87479

1. Release the catches.2. Remove the cover.

3

3

3

E87480

3. Remove the relevant fuse box cover.

CHANGING A FUSE

WARNINGSDo not modify the electrical systemof your vehicle in any way. Haverepairs to the electrical system and

the replacement of relays and high currentfuses carried out by a properly trainedtechnician.

Switch the ignition and all electricalequipment off before touching orattempting to change a fuse.

CAUTIONFit a replacement fuse with the samerating as the one you have removed.

Note: You can identify a blown fuse by abreak in the filament.Note: All fuses, except high current fuses,are a push fit.Note: A fuse puller is located in the enginecompartment fuse box.

195

Fuses

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHARTEngine compartment fuse box

E75525

Circuits protectedAmpere ratingFuse

Transmission control module (AWF21)10F1

Transmission control module (MPS6)15F1

Glow plug monitoring (diesel engines)5F2

196

Fuses


Vaporiser glow plug monitoring (2.0L Duratorq-TDCiStage V and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)5F2

Engine cooling fan - twin fan (2.3L Duratec-HE and2.2L Duratorq-TDCi automatic)701F3

Electric hydraulic power steering (EHPAS) (1.6LDuratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V, 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi, 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi, 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi Stage V)

801F3

Glow plugs60F4

Engine cooling fan (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2L Duratorq-TDCimanual, 1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V, 2.0LDuratec-HE, 2.3L Duratec-HE, 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi)

60F5

Engine cooling fan - twin fan (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi)70F5

HEGO sensor (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)7.5F6

HEGO sensors 1, CMS sensor, Oxygen sensor (enginemanagement)10F6

Vaporiser glow plug (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi Stage V)20F6

Relay coils5F7

Powertrain control module, Fuel metering unit, MAFsensor, fuel rail pressure control valve (enginemanagement).

10F8

Powertrain control module (2.0L EcoBoost SCTi and2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)20F8

Powertrain control module (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi, 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi and 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)15F8

MAF Sensor, Fuel Injectors, Variable Intake Valve,Variable Exhaust Valve, ignition coils (enginemanagement).

10F9

Fuel pump vaporiser (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)5F9

MAF Sensor, EGR bypass Valve , Fuel pump vaporiser(2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V) (engine management)7.5F9

197

Fuses


Degas valve, TMAF sensor, active grille shutter, bypassvalve, relay coil, auxiliary run on, water pump (1.6LEcoBoost SCTi).

7.5F9

Engine control module (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 1.6LDuratec-16V Ti-VCT Stage V)10F10

Auxiliary run on, water pump (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi)7.5F10

PCV Valve, VCV Valve, Water in Fuel Sensor, SonicPurge Valve, Swirl Control Valve, Variable Intake Valve,EGR Valve, IVVT Oil Control Valve (engine manage-ment). T.MAF sensor, variable exhaust timing valve,active grille shutter, cannister purge valve, turbo controlvalve, waste gate valve (engine management).

10F11

Turbo control valve, MAF sensor, active grille shutter,EGR valve, VCV valve (1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)10F11

MAF sensor, Water in Fuel Sensor, Active grille shutter,inlet metering valve (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V).5F11

Fuel rail pressure, fuel metering unit, fuel pumpvaporiser, active grille shutter (2.2L Duratorq-TDCiStage V)

7.5F11

Turbo control valve, variable intake timing valve, vari-able exhaust timing valve, cannister purge valve,electrical bypass valve (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi).

10F11

Ignition coils (1.6L EcoBoost SCTi and 2.0L EcoBoostSCTi)15F12

Coil on Plug; Canister Purge Valve, Power SteeringPressure Switch (engine management)10F12

EGR throttle, variable turbo control (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi)10F12

Relay coils (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V, 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi Stage V and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)5F12

Air conditioning15F13

Diesel filter heater (2.0L Duratorq-TDCi, 2.0L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V and 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi)15F14

HEGO sensor (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)10F14

Starter relay40F15

198

Fuses


Diesel auxiliary heater (PTC)80F16

Central fuse box supply A60F17

Central fuse box supply B60F18

Rear fuse box supply C60F19

Rear fuse box supply D60F20

VQM/non VQM: Cluster/Audio/AC/FLR30F21

Windscreen wiper module30F22

Heated rear window30F23

Headlamp washer30F24

ABS valves30F25

ABS pump40F26

Fuel fired heater25F27

Heater blower40F28

Not used–F29

ABS 30 feed5F30

Horn15F31

Fuel fired heater - remote control5F32

Light switch module, engine compartment fuse boxcoils5F33

Heated windscreen (left-hand side)40F34

Heated windscreen (right-hand side)40F35

Rear wiper 15 feed15F36

Heated front washer jets/FLR + FSM KL157.5F37

PCM/TCM/EHPAS 15 feed10F38

Adaptive front lighting system (AFS)15F39

Headlamp levelling / AFS module5F40

Instrument panel20F41

199

Fuses


Cluster IP5F42

Audio/BVC module/DAB module15F43

Automatic AC / Manual AC5F44

FLR (Start Stop)5F451Fit a replacement with the same rating as the one you have removed.

Central fuse box

E124888

A B

200

Fuses

Left-hand driveARight-hand driveB


Steering wheel module7.5F1

Cluster5F2

Interior lamps10F3

Engine immobiliser5F4

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)7.5F5

Rain sensor5F6

Cigar lighter20F7

Fuel filler flap unlock supply10F8

Windscreen washers - rear15F9

Windscreen washers - front15F10

Luggage compartment release supply10F11

Fuel filler flap lock supply10F12

Fuel pump20F13

Fuel pump (2.2L Duratorq-TDCi Stage V)7.5F13

Remote frequency receiver, Interior motion sensor5F14

Ignition switch5F15

Battery backup sounder (alarm system), OBD II(board computer diagnostics)5F16

Steering wheel vibration actuator5F17

SRS (airbag) supply10F18

ABS, yaw rate sensor (ESP), electric parking brake(EPB), accelerator pedal supply7.5F19

Electronic feed, electronic fuse, Auto-dimming mirror,lane departure warning7.5F20

Radio supply15F21

201

Fuses


Brake lamp switch5F22

Sunroof20F23

Climate Control Module and Steering Column Unitsupply5F24

Rear fuse box4-door and 5-door

E87483

202

Fuses

Estate

E75526


Door module (left-hand front) (window up/down,central locking, electric folding mirror, heated mirror)25FA1

Door module (right-hand front) (window up/down,central locking, electric folding mirror, heated mirror)25FA2

Door module (left-hand rear) (window up/down)25FA3

203

Fuses


Door module (right-hand rear) (window up/down)25FA4

Rear locking (without rear door modules)10FA5

Auxiliary power socket15FA6

Relay coils5FA7

Keyless vehicle module20FA8

Relay coils VQM (Start Stop)5FA9

Not used-FA10

Accessories, trailer module20FA11

Electric driver's seat30FA12

Not used-FB1

Suspension module15FB2

Heated driver's seat15FB3

Heated front passenger seat15FB4

Left-hand rear heated seat15FB5

Not used-FB6

Right-hand rear heated seat15FB7

Parking aid, BLIS5FB8

Electric front passenger seat30FB9

Anti-theft alarm horn10FB10

Not used–FB11

Not used–FB12

Not used-FC1

Not used-FC2

Not used-FC3

Not used-FC4

Keyless vehicle20FC5

Not used-FC6

204

Fuses


Seat memory function module5FC7

Rear seat entertainment/CD Changer7.5FC8

Audio amplifier20FC9

Sony audio system10FC10

Not used–FC11

Not used–FC12

205

Fuses

TOWING POINTSTowing eye locationThe screw-in towing eye is located in thespare wheel well.The towing eye must always be carried inthe vehicle.

Installing the towing eyeCAUTION

The screw-in towing eye has aleft-hand thread. Turn itanti-clockwise to install it. Make sure

that the towing eye is fully tightened.

Front towing eye

E87280

Rear towing eye

E87282

Insert your finger into the hole on theunderside of the cover and prise off thecover. Install the towing eye.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ONFOUR WHEELSAll vehicles

WARNINGSSwitch the ignition on when yourvehicle is being towed. The steeringlock will engage and the direction

indicators and brake lamps will not workif you do not.

The brake and steering assistancewill not operate unless the engine isrunning. Press the brake pedal harder

and allow for increased stopping distancesand heavier steering.

CAUTIONSToo much tension in the tow ropecould cause damage to your vehicleor the vehicle that is towing.Do not use a rigid tow bar on the fronttowing eye.

206

Vehicle recovery

CAUTIONSSelect neutral when your vehicle isbeing towed.

Drive off slowly and smoothly withoutjerking the vehicle that is towing.

Vehicles with automatictransmission

CAUTIONSIf a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph) and adistance of 20 kilometres (12 miles)is to be exceeded the drive wheels

must be lifted clear of the ground.It is recommended not to tow with thedrive wheels on the ground. However,if it is required to move the vehicle

from a dangerous location, do not tow yourvehicle faster than 20 km/h (12 mph) orfurther than 20 kilometres (12 miles).

Do not tow your vehicle backwards.

In the event of a mechanical failure ofthe transmission the drive wheelsmust be lifted clear of the ground.Do not tow your vehicle if the ambienttemperature is below 0ºC (32ºF).

207

Vehicle recovery

GENERAL INFORMATIONHave your vehicle serviced regularly to helpmaintain its roadworthiness and resalevalue. There is a large network of FordAuthorised Repairers that are there to helpyou with their professional servicingexpertise. We believe that their speciallytrained technicians are best qualified toservice your vehicle properly and expertly.They are supported by a wide range ofhighly specialised tools developedspecifically for servicing your vehicle.In addition to regular servicing, werecommend that you carry out thefollowing additional checks.

WARNINGSSwitch the ignition off beforetouching or attempting adjustmentof any kind.Do not touch the electronic ignitionsystem parts after you have switchedthe ignition on or when the engine is

running. The system operates at highvoltage.

Keep your hands and clothing clearof the engine cooling fan. Undercertain conditions, the fan may

continue to run for several minutes afteryou have switched the engine off.

CAUTIONWhen carrying out maintenancechecks, make sure that filler caps arefitted securely.

Daily checks• Exterior lamps.• Interior lamps.• Warning lamps and indicators.

Check when refuelling• Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check

(page 220).• Brake fluid level. See Brake and

Clutch Fluid Check (page 221).• Washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid

Check (page 222).• Tyre pressures (when cold). See

Technical Specifications (page 240).• Tyre condition. See Tyre Care (page

238).

Monthly checks• Engine coolant level (engine cold). See

Engine Coolant Check (page 220).• Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.• Power steering fluid level. See Power

Steering Fluid Check (page 221).• Air conditioning operation.• Parking brake operation.• Horn operation.• Tightness of wheel nuts. See

Technical Specifications (page 240).

OPENING AND CLOSING THEBONNETOpening the bonnet

E73698

208

Maintenance

E87785

Raise the bonnet slightly and move thecatch towards the left-hand side of thevehicle.

E87786

Open the bonnet and support it with thestrut.

Closing the bonnetWARNING

Make sure that the bonnet is closedproperly.

Lower the bonnet and allow it to drop fromunder its own weight for the last 20 – 30centimetres (8 - 11 inches).

209

Maintenance

UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 1.6L DURATEC-16V TI-VCT (SIGMA)

A C

GJ F

D EB

HIE87714

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 221).

A

Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine Oil Check (page 220).BBrake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 221).

C

Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 227).DEngine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 194).EAir cleaner. No maintenance necessary.FScreen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).GEngine oil dipstick1. See Engine Oil Check (page 220).HPower steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 221).IEngine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).J

1The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are coloured for easy identification.

210

Maintenance

UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 1.6L ECOBOOST SCTI (SIGMA)

E132430

A

J I G FH

B C D E


A


C

Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 227).DEngine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 194).EAir cleaner. No maintenance necessary.FScreen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).GEngine oil dipstick1. See Engine Oil Check (page 220).H

211

Maintenance

Power steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 221).IEngine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).J


UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATEC-HE (MI4)

A C

GJ F

D EB

HIE73231


A


C

Battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 227).DEngine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 196).EAir cleaner. No maintenance necessary.FScreen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).GEngine oil dipstick1. See Engine Oil Check (page 220).H

212

Maintenance



UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST SCTI (MI4)

A C

GHJ I F

D EB

E124921


A


C


213

Maintenance



UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.3L DURATEC-HE (MI4)

E81313

A C

GJ F

D EB

HI


A


C


214

Maintenance



UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 1.6L DURATORQ-TDCI (DV) DIESEL

A

J I G FH

B C D E

E135199


A


C

Battery. See Vehicle battery (page 227).DEngine compartment fuse box. See Fuses (page 194).EAir cleaner. No maintenance necessary.FScreen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).G

215

Maintenance

Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine Oil Check (page 220).HPower steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 221).IEngine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).J


UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL

A C

GJ I F

D EB

HE73234

216

Maintenance

A C

GHJ I F

D EB

E124913


A


C

Battery. See Jump-Starting the Vehicle (page 227).DEngine compartment fuse box. See Fuse Specification Chart (page 196).EAir cleaner. No maintenance necessary.FScreen washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).GEngine oil dipstick1. See Engine Oil Check (page 220).HPower steering fluid reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 221).IEngine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).J


217

Maintenance

UNDER BONNET OVERVIEW - 2.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL

A C

GJ F

D EB

HIE87715

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive): See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 221).

A

Engine oil filler cap1: See Engine Oil Check (page 220).BBrake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive): See Brake and Clutch FluidCheck (page 221).

C

Battery: See Vehicle battery (page 227).DEngine compartment fuse box: See Fuses (page 194).EAir cleaner: No maintenance necessary.FScreen washer fluid reservoir: See Washer Fluid Check (page 222).GEngine oil dipstick1: See Engine Oil Check (page 220).HPower steering fluid reservoir: See Power Steering Fluid Check (page 221).IEngine coolant reservoir: See Engine Coolant Check (page 220).J


218

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6LDURATEC-16V TI-VCT (SIGMA)

E95540

BA

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6LECOBOOST SCTI (SIGMA)

A B

E134114

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0LDURATEC-HE (MI4)/2.3LDURATEC-HE (MI4)

E92036

A B

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0LECOBOOST SCTI (MI4)

E124917

A B

E134040

A B

MINAMAXB

219

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 1.6LDURATORQ-TDCI (DV)DIESEL/2.0L DURATORQ-TDCI(DW) DIESEL/2.2LDURATORQ-TDCI (DW) DIESEL

E95543

BA

MINAMAXB

ENGINE OIL CHECK

CAUTIONDo not use oil additives or otherengine treatments. Under certainconditions, they could damage the

engine.

Note: The oil consumption of new enginesreaches its normal level after approximately5000 kilometres (3000 miles).

Checking the oil levelCAUTION

Make sure that the level is betweenthe MIN and the MAX marks.

Note: Check the level before starting theengine.Note: Make sure that your vehicle is on levelground.

Note: Oil expands when it is hot. The levelmay therefore extend a few millimetresbeyond the MAX mark.Remove the dipstick and wipe it with aclean, lint free cloth. Replace the dipstickand remove it again to check the oil level.If the level is at the MIN mark, top upimmediately.

Topping upWARNINGS

Only top up when the engine is cold.If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutesfor the engine to cool down.Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.

Remove the filler cap.WARNING

Do not top up further than the MAXmark.

Note: Soak up any spillage with anabsorbent cloth immediately.Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 222).Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you feela strong resistance.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECKChecking the coolant level

WARNINGDo not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your doctor.

220

Maintenance

CAUTIONMake sure that the level is betweenthe MIN and the MAX marks.

Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. Thelevel may therefore extend beyond the MAXmark.If the level is at the MIN mark, top upimmediately.

Topping upWARNINGS

Only top up when the engine is cold.If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutesfor the engine to cool down.Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is hot. Wait for the engineto cool down.Undiluted coolant is flammable andmay ignite if spilt on a hot exhaust.

CAUTIONSIn an emergency, you can add justwater to the cooling system to reacha vehicle service station. Have the

system checked by a properly trainedtechnician as soon as possible.

Prolonged use of incorrect dilution ofthe coolant can cause engine damagefrom corrosion, overheating or

freezing.

Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure willescape slowly as you unscrew the cap.

CAUTIONDo not top up further than the MAXmark.

Top up with a 50/50 mixture of coolantand water using fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 222).

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUIDCHECK

WARNINGSUse of any fluid other than therecommended brake fluid mayreduce brake efficiency and not meet

Ford's performance standards.Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your doctor.If the level is at the MIN mark, havethe system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as

possible.

Note: Keep brake fluid clean and dry.Contamination with dirt, water, petroleumproducts or other materials may result inbrake system damage and possible failure.Note: The brake and the clutch systems aresupplied from the same reservoir.Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 222).

POWER STEERING FLUIDCHECK

WARNINGDo not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with

plenty of water and contact your doctor.

221

Maintenance

CAUTIONMake sure that the level is betweenthe MIN and the MAX marks.

If the level is at the MIN mark, top upimmediately.

Topping upRemove the filler cap.

CAUTIONDo not top up further than the MAXmark.

Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 222).

WASHER FLUID CHECKNote: The front and rear washer systemsare supplied from the same reservoir.When topping up, use a mixture of washerfluid and water to help prevent freezing incold weather and improve the cleaningcapability. We recommend that you useonly high quality washer fluid.For information on fluid dilution, refer tothe product instructions.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSVehicle fluidsNote: Use fluids which meet the specifications or requirements defined. Use of other fluidsmay lead to damage which is not covered by your Warranty.

Recommended fluidViscosityGradeSpecificationItem

Castrol or Ford Engine Oil5W-20WSS-M2C948-BEngine oil - petrolengines only

Castrol or Ford Engine Oil5W-30WSS-M2C913-CAlternative engine oil- all petrol engines

Castrol or Ford Engine Oil5W-30WSS-M2C913-CEngine oil - dieselengines

Motorcraft SuperPlus Anti-freeze-WSS-M97B44-DAntifreeze

222

Maintenance

Recommended fluidViscosityGradeSpecificationItem

Motorcraft or Ford DOT 4LV High PerformanceBrake Fluid

-WSS-M6C65-A2 orISO 4925 Class 6Brake fluid

Ford Power Steering Fluid-WSS-M2C204-A2Power steering fluid

Your engine has been designed to be used with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which givesa fuel economy benefit whilst maintaining the durability of your engine.Topping up the oil: If you are unable to find an oil that meets the specification definedby WSS-M2C913-C or WSS-M2C948-B (petrol engines only), you must use SAE 5W-30that meets the specification defined by ACEA A5/B5.Using topping up oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine crankingperiods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emissionlevels.Castrol engine oil recommended.

E115472

Capacities

Capacity in Litres (gallons)ItemVariant

MAX markPower steering systemAll

3.8 (0.8)Windscreen and rearwindow washer systemAll

70 (15.4)Fuel tankAll

4.1 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT

3.8 (0.8)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT

6 (1.3)Engine cooling system1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT

4.1 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)

3.8 (0.8)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)

223

Maintenance

Capacity in Litres (gallons)ItemVariant

6.5 (1.4)Engine cooling system1.6L EcoBoost SCTi (Sigma)

4.3 (1.0)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.0L Duratec-HE

3.9 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.0L Duratec-HE

6.2 (1.4)Engine cooling system2.0L Duratec-HE

5.4 (1.2)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.0L EcoBoost SCTi

5.1 (1.1)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.0L EcoBoost SCTi

approx. 6.9 (1.5)Engine cooling system2.0L EcoBoost SCTi

4.3 (1.0)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.3L Duratec-HE

3.9 (0.9)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.3L Duratec-HE

6.9 (1.5)Engine cooling system2.3L Duratec-HE

3.8 (0.8)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter1.6L Duratorq-TDCi

3.5 (0.8)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter1.6L Duratorq-TDCi

7.3 (1.6)Engine cooling system1.6L Duratorq-TDCi

5.5 (1.2)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.0L Duratorq-TDCi

5 (1.1)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.0L Duratorq-TDCi


6 (1.3)Engine lubrication system -including the oil filter2.2L Duratorq-TDCi

5.4 (1.2)Engine lubrication system -excluding the oil filter2.2L Duratorq-TDCi


224

Maintenance

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR

WARNINGIf you use a car wash with a waxingcycle, make sure that you remove thewax from the windscreen.

CAUTIONSPrior to using a car wash facility checkthe suitability of it for your vehicle.Some car wash installations usewater at high pressure. This coulddamage certain parts of your vehicle.Remove the aerial before using anautomatic car wash.Switch the heater blower off toprevent contamination of the fresh airfilter.

We recommend that you wash your vehiclewith a sponge and lukewarm watercontaining a car shampoo.

Cleaning the headlampsCAUTIONS

Do not scrape the headlamp lensesor use abrasives, alcoholic solvents orchemical solvents to clean them.Do not wipe the headlamps whenthey are dry.

Cleaning the rear windowCAUTION

Do not scrape the inside of the rearwindow or use abrasives or chemicalsolvents to clean it.

Use a clean, lint free cloth or a dampchamois leather to clean the inside of therear window.

Cleaning the chrome trimCAUTION

Do not use abrasives or chemicalsolvents. Use soapy water.

Cleaning the alloy wheelsNote: Do not apply a cleaning chemical towarm or hot wheel rims and covers.Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, incombination with brush agitation to removebrake dust and dirt, could wear away theclear coat finish over a period time.Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-basedor high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steelwool, fuels or strong household detergent.Note: If you intend parking your vehicle foran extended period after cleaning thewheels with a wheel cleaner, drive yourvehicle for a few minutes before doing so.This will reduce the risk of increasedcorrosion of the brake discs, brake pads andlinings.Note: Some automatic car washes maycause damage to the finish on your wheelrims and covers.Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coatedwith a clear coat paint finish. To maintaintheir condition we recommend that you:• Clean them weekly with the

recommended wheel and tyre cleaner.• Use a sponge to remove heavy

deposits of dirt and brake dustaccumulation.

• Rinse them thoroughly with apressurised stream of water when youhave completed the cleaning process.

We recommend that you use Ford servicewheel cleaner. Make sure that you readand follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

225

Vehicle Care

Using other non-recommended cleaningproducts can result in severe andpermanent cosmetic damage.

Body paintwork preservationCAUTIONS

Do not polish your vehicle in strongsunshine.Do not allow polish to touch plasticsurfaces. It could be difficult toremove.Do not apply polish to the windscreenor rear window. This could cause thewipers to become noisy and they may

not clear the window properly.

We recommend that you wax thepaintwork once or twice a year.

CLEANING THE INTERIORSeat belts

WARNINGSDo not use abrasives, or chemicalsolvents to clean them.Do not allow moisture to penetratethe seat belt retractor mechanism.

Clean the seat belts with interior cleaneror water applied with a soft sponge. Letthe seat belts dry naturally, away fromartificial heat.

Instrument cluster screens, LCDscreens, radio screens

WARNINGDo not use abrasives, alcoholicsolvents or chemical solvents toclean them.

Rear windowsCAUTIONS

Do not use any abrasive materials toclean the interior of the rear windows.Do not install stickers or labels to theinterior of the rear windows.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINTDAMAGE

CAUTIONRemove apparently harmless lookingsubstances from the paintworkimmediately (e.g. bird droppings, tree

resins, insect remains, tar spots, road saltand industrial fall out).

You should repair paintwork damagecaused by stones from the road or minorscratches as soon as possible. A choice ofproducts is available from your FordDealer. Read and follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

226

Vehicle Care

JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE

WARNINGDo not use fuel lines, engine rockercovers or the intake manifold asgrounding points.

CAUTIONSConnect batteries with only the samenominal voltage.Always use booster cables withinsulated clamps and adequate sizecable.Do not disconnect the battery fromthe vehicle’s electrical system.

To connect the booster cables

A

B

C D

E102925

Flat battery vehicleABooster battery vehicleBPositive connection cableCNegative connection cableD

1. Position the vehicles so that they donot touch one another.

2. Switch off the engine and any electricalequipment.

3. Connect the positive (+) terminal ofvehicle B with the positive (+) terminalof vehicle A (cable C).

4. Connect the negative (-) terminal ofvehicle B to the ground connection ofvehicle A (cable D). See Batteryconnection points (page 228).

227

Vehicle battery

CAUTIONSDo not connect to the negative (–)terminal of the flat battery.Make sure that the cables are clear ofany moving parts and fuel deliverysystem parts.

To start the engine1. Run the engine of vehicle B at

moderately high speed.2. Start the engine of vehicle A.3. Run both vehicles for a minimum of

three minutes before disconnecting thecables.

CAUTIONDo not switch on the headlamps whendisconnecting the cables. The peakvoltage could blow the bulbs.

Disconnect the cables in the reverse order.

CHANGING THE VEHICLEBATTERY

CAUTIONFor vehicles with Start-stop thebattery requirement is different. Itmust be replaced by one of exactly

the same specification as the original.

Note: Where applicable, the audio systemmust be reprogrammed with the keycode.The battery is located in the enginecompartment. See Maintenance (page208).

BATTERY CONNECTIONPOINTS

E114494

CAUTIONDo not connect to the negative (–)terminal of the flat battery.

228

Vehicle battery

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTIONSUse only approved wheel and tyresizes. Using other sizes could damagethe vehicle and will make the National

Type Approval invalid.If you change the diameter of the tyresfrom that fitted at the factory, thespeedometer may not display the

correct speed. Take the vehicle to yourdealer to have the engine managementsystem reprogrammed.

If you intend to change the size of thewheels from that fitted at the factory,check the suitability with your dealer.

Note: Check your tyre pressures regularlyto optimise fuel economy.A decal with tyre pressure data is locatedin the driver’s door opening at the B-pillar.Check and set the tyre pressure at theambient temperature in which you areintending to drive the vehicle and when thetyres are cold.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEELLocking wheel nutsYou can obtain a replacement lockingwheel nut key and replacement lockingwheel nuts from your dealer using thereference number certificate.

Vehicles with a temporary sparewheel


Drive the shortest possible distances.

WARNINGSDo not fit more than one spare wheelon your vehicle at any one time.Do not use snow chains on this typeof wheel.Do not drive through an automaticcar wash.Do not carry out any tyre repairs ona temporary spare wheel.

CAUTIONThe ground clearance of your vehiclewill be reduced. Take care whenparking next to a curb.

Note: Your vehicle may exhibit someunusual driving characteristics.

Vehicle jackWARNINGS

The vehicle jack supplied with yourvehicle should only be used whenchanging a wheel in emergency

situations.Before using the vehicle jack, checkthat it is not damaged or deformedand that the thread is lubricated and

free from foreign matter.Never place anything between thejack and the ground, or the jack andthe vehicle.

Note: Vehicles with a tyre repair kit are notequipped with a vehicle jack or a wheelbrace.It is recommended to use a workshop typehydraulic jack for changing betweensummer and winter tyres.

229

Wheels and Tyres

Note: Use a jack with a minimum liftingcapacity of 1.5 tonnes and a lifting plate witha minimum diameter of 80 millimetres (3.1inches).Vehicles without tyre repair kit

A

B

C

E86843

JackAWheel braceBSpace for locking wheel nut keyC

Your vehicle jack and wheel brace arelocated in the spare wheel well.

Jacking and lifting pointsCAUTION

Use only the specified jacking points.If you use other positions, you maydamage the body, steering,

suspension, engine, braking system or thefuel lines.

230

Wheels and Tyres

E92658

A

B

Emergency use onlyAMaintenanceB

E93184

A

Indentations in the sills A show thelocation of the jacking points.

E92932

231

Wheels and Tyres

E93020

Vehicles with side skirts

E95345

Assembling the wheel braceType one

WARNINGWhen returning the wheel braceextension to its original position, takecare not to get your fingers caught.

Note: Make sure that the wheel brace isfully extended.

E122546

Extend the wheel brace.

Type two

CAUTIONThe screw-in towing eye has aleft-hand thread. Turn itanti-clockwise to install it. Make sure

that the towing eye is fully tightened.

The screw-in towing eye is located in thespare wheel well.

E122502

Insert the screw-in towing eye into thewheel brace.

Removing the wheel trimType oneInsert the flat end of the wheel bracebetween the rim and the trim and carefullyremove the trim.

232

Wheels and Tyres

Type two

E122314

2

1

1. Insert the wheel trim remover.2. Remove the wheel trim.Note: Make sure that you pull the wheeltrim remover at right angles to the trim.

Removing a road wheelWARNINGS

Park your vehicle in such a positionthat neither the traffic nor you arehindered or endangered.Set up a warning triangle.

Make sure that the vehicle is on firm,level ground with the wheels pointingstraight ahead.Switch off the ignition and apply theparking brake.If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, select first or reversegear. If it has an automatic

transmission, select park.Have the passengers leave thevehicle.

WARNINGSSecure the diagonally oppositewheel with an appropriate block orwheel chock.Make sure that the arrows ondirectional tyres point in the directionof rotation when the vehicle is

moving forwards. If you have to fit a sparewheel with the arrows pointing in theopposite direction, have the tyre refittedin the correct direction by a properlytrained technician.

Do not work underneath the vehiclewhen it is supported only by a jack.Make sure that the jack is vertical tothe jacking point and the base is flaton the ground.

CAUTIONDo not lay alloy wheels face down onthe ground, this will damage the paint.

Note: The spare wheel is located under thefloor cover in the luggage compartment.

E71948

1. Install the locking wheel nut key.

233

Wheels and Tyres

2. Slacken the wheel nuts.3. Jack up the vehicle until the tyre is clear

of the ground.4. Remove the wheel nuts and the wheel.

Installing a road wheelWARNINGS

Use only approved wheel and tyresizes. Using other sizes coulddamage the vehicle and will make

the National Type Approval invalid. SeeTechnical Specifications (page 240).

Do not fit run flat tyres on vehiclesthat were not originally fitted withthem. Please contact your dealer for

more details regarding compatibility.

CAUTIONDo not install alloy wheels usingwheel nuts designed for use with steelwheels.

Note: The wheel nuts of alloy wheels andspoked steel wheels can also be used forthe steel spare wheel for a short time(maximum two weeks).Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contactsurfaces are free from foreign matter.Note: Make sure that the cones on thewheel nuts are against the wheel.1. Install the wheel.2. Install the wheel nuts finger tight.3. Install the locking wheel nut key.

1

2

3 4

5

E75442

4. Partially tighten the wheel nuts in thesequence shown.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.6. Fully tighten the wheel nuts in the

sequence shown. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 240).

7. Install the hub cap or cover using theball of your hand.

WARNINGHave the wheel nuts checked fortightness and the tyre pressurechecked as soon as possible.

TEMPORARY MOBILITY KITYour vehicle may not have a spare tyre. Inthis case it will have an emergency tyrerepair kit that can be used to repair oneflat tyre.The tyre repair kit is located in the sparewheel well.

234

Wheels and Tyres

General informationWARNINGS

Depending on the type and extent oftyre damage, some tyres can only bepartially sealed or not sealed at all.

Loss of tyre pressure can affect vehiclehandling, leading to loss of vehicle control.

Do not use the tyre repair kit if thetyre has already been damaged as aresult of being driven under inflated.Do not use the tyre repair kit on runflat tyres.Do not try to seal damage other thanthat located within the visible treadof the tyre.Do not try to seal damage to thetyre’s sidewall.

The tyre repair kit seals most tyrepunctures [with a diameter of up to sixmillimetres (1/4 inch)] to temporarilyrestore mobility.Observe the following rules when using thekit:• Drive with caution and avoid

making sudden steering or drivingmanoeuvres, especially if the vehicleis heavily loaded or you are towing atrailer.

• The kit will provide you with anemergency temporary repair, enablingyou to continue your journey to the nextvehicle or tyre dealer, or to drive amaximum distance of 200 kilometres(125 miles).

• Do not exceed a maximum speed of80 km/h (50 mph).

• Keep the kit out of the reach ofchildren.

• Only use the kit when the ambienttemperature is between –30°C (-22°F)and +70°C (+158°F).

Using the tyre repair kitWARNINGS

Compressed air can act as anexplosive or propellant.Never leave the tyre repair kitunattended while in use.

CAUTIONDo not keep the compressor operatingfor more than 10 minutes.

Note: Use the tyre repair kit only for thevehicle with which it was supplied.• Park your vehicle at the roadside so

that you do not obstruct the flow oftraffic and so that you are able to usethe kit without being in danger.

• Apply the parking brake, even if youhave parked on a level road, to makesure that the vehicle will not move.

• Do not attempt to remove foreignobjects like nails or screws penetratingthe tyre.

• Leave the engine running while the kitis in use, but not if the vehicle is in anenclosed or poorly ventilated area (forexample, inside a building). In thesecircumstances, switch the compressoron with the engine turned off.

• Replace the sealant bottle with a newone before the expiry date (see top ofbottle) is reached.

• Inform all other users of the vehiclethat the tyre has been temporarilysealed with the tyre repair kit and makethem aware of the special drivingconditions to be observed.

235

Wheels and Tyres

Inflating the tyreWARNINGS

Check the sidewall of the tyre priorto inflation. If there are any cracks,bumps or similar damage, do not

attempt to inflate the tyre.Do not stand directly beside the tyrewhile the compressor is pumping.Watch the sidewall of the tyre. If anycracks, bumps or similar damageappear, turn off the compressor and

let the air out by means of the pressurerelief valve B. Do not continue driving withthis tyre.

The sealant contains natural rubberlatex. Avoid contact with skin andclothing. If this happens, rinse the

affected areas immediately with plenty ofwater and contact your doctor.

If the tyre inflation pressure does notreach 1.8 bar (26 psi) within sevenminutes, the tyre may have suffered

excessive damage, making a temporaryrepair impossible. In this case, do notcontinue driving with this tyre.

CAUTIONScrewing the bottle onto the bottleholder will pierce the seal of thebottle. Do not unscrew the bottle from

the holder as the sealant will escape.

E94973

BJ

I

FE

C

KA

G

H

D

Protective capAPressure relief valveBHoseCOrange capDBottle holderEPressure gaugeFPower plug with cableGCompressor switchHLabelIBottle lidJSealant bottleK

236

Wheels and Tyres

1. Open the lid of the tyre repair kit.2. Peel off the label I showing the

maximum permissible speed of80 km/h (50 mph) from the casing andattach it to the instrument panel in thedriver’s field of view. Make sure thelabel does not obscure anythingimportant.

3. Take the hose C and the power plugwith cable G out of the kit.

4. Unscrew the orange cap D and thebottle lid J.

5. Screw the sealant bottle K clockwiseinto the bottle holder E fully tight.

6. Remove the valve cap from thedamaged tyre.

7. Detach the protective cap A from thehose C and screw the hose C firmlyonto the valve of the damaged tyre.

8. Make sure that the compressor switchH is in position 0.

9. Insert the power plug G into the cigarlighter socket or auxiliary power socket.See Cigar Lighter (page 127). SeeAuxiliary Power Points (page 128).

10. Start the engine.11. Move the compressor switch H to

position 1.12. Inflate the tyre for no longer than

seven minutes to an inflation pressureof minimum 1.8 bar (26 psi) and amaximum of 3.5 bar (51 psi). Movethe compressor switch H to position0 and check the current tyre pressurewith pressure gauge F.

13. Remove the power plug G from thecigar lighter socket or auxiliary powersocket.

14. Quickly unscrew the hose C from thetyre valve and replace the protectivecap A. Fasten the valve cap again.

15. Leave the sealant bottle K in thebottle holder E.

16. Make sure the kit, the bottle lid andthe orange cap are stored safely, butstill easily accessible in the vehicle.The kit will be required again whenyou check the tyre pressure.

17. Immediately drive approximatelythree kilometres (two miles) so thatthe sealant can seal the damagedarea.

Note: When pumping in the sealant throughthe tyre valve, the pressure may rise up to6 bar (87 psi) but will drop again after about30 seconds.

WARNINGIf you experience heavy vibrations,unsteady steering behaviour ornoises while driving, reduce your

speed and drive with caution to a placewhere it is safe for you to stop the vehicle.Recheck the tyre and its pressure. If thetyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar (19 psi) orif there are any cracks, bumps or similardamage visible, do not continue drivingwith this tyre.

Checking the tyre pressure1. Stop the vehicle after driving

approximately three kilometres(two miles). Check, and wherenecessary, adjust the pressure of thedamaged tyre.

2. Attach the kit and read the tyrepressure from the pressure gauge F.

3. If the pressure of the sealant-filled tyreis 1.3 bar (19 psi) or more, adjust it tothe specified pressure. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 240).

4. Follow the inflation procedure onceagain to top up the tyre.

5. Check the tyre pressure again from thepressure gauge F. If the tyre pressureis too high, deflate the tyre to thespecified pressure using the pressurerelief valve B.

237

Wheels and Tyres

6. Once you have inflated the tyre to itscorrect tyre pressure, move thecompressor switch H to position 0,remove the power plug G from thesocket, unscrew the hose C, fasten thevalve cap and replace the protectivecap A.

7. Leave the sealant bottle K in the bottleholder E and store the kit away safelyin its original location.

8. Drive to the nearest tyre specialist toget the damaged tyre replaced. Beforethe tyre is removed from the rim, informyour tyre dealer that the tyre containssealant. Renew the kit as soon aspossible after it has been used once.

Note: Remember that emergency roadsidetyre repair kits only provide temporarymobility. Regulations concerning tyre repairafter usage of tyre repair kit may differ fromcountry to country. You should consult atyre specialist for advice.

WARNINGBefore driving, make sure the tyre isadjusted to the recommendedinflation pressure. See Technical

Specifications (page 240). Monitor thetyre pressure until the sealed tyre isreplaced.

Empty sealant bottles can be disposed oftogether with normal household waste.Return remains of sealant to your dealeror dispose of it in compliance with localwaste disposal regulations.

TYRE CARE

E70415

To make sure the front and rear tyres ofyour vehicle wear evenly and last longer,we recommend that you swap the tyresfrom front to rear and vice versa at regularintervals of between 5000 and 10000kilometres (3000 and 6000 miles).

CAUTIONDo not scrub the sidewalls of the tyreswhen you are parking.

If you have to mount a kerb, do so slowlyand approach it with the wheels atright-angles to the kerb.Examine the tyres regularly for cuts, foreignobjects and uneven wear of the tread.Uneven wear could mean that the wheelalignment is outside specification.Check the tyre pressures (including thespare) when cold, every two weeks.

USING WINTER TYRES

CAUTIONMake sure that you use the correctwheel nuts for the type of wheel thewinter tyres are fitted to.

If winter tyres are used, make sure that thetyre pressures are correct. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 240).

238

Wheels and Tyres

USING SNOW CHAINS


Do not use snow chains on snow-freeroads.Only fit snow chains to specifiedtyres. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 240).

CAUTIONIf your vehicle is fitted with wheeltrims, remove them before fittingsnow chains.

Note: The ABS will continue to operatenormally.Only use small link snow chains.Only use snow chains on the front wheels.

Vehicles with stability control(ESP)Vehicles with stability control (ESP) mayexhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics which can be reduced byswitching traction control off. See UsingStability Control (page 155).

TYRE PRESSUREMONITORING SYSTEM

WARNINGSThe system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to regularly checkthe tyre pressures.The system will only provide a lowtyre pressure warning. It will notinflate the tyres.

WARNINGSThe system may take longer todetect low pressure in the tyres if youhave fitted snow chains.Do not drive on significantlyunder-inflated tyres. This may causethe tyres to overheat and fail.

Under-inflation reduces fuel efficiency, tyretread life and may also affect your abilityto drive the vehicle safely.

Do not bend or damage the valveswhen you are inflating the tyres.Have tyres installed by properlytrained technicians.

Note: After changing the tyres or sensorsthe system will take a few minutes to reset.During this period the system is operationalbut a warning lamp may appear.Note: If you fit tyres that do not havemonitoring sensors, a message will beshown in the display. See InformationMessages (page 98). Confirm this messageto deactivate the system.The system monitors the pressure in thetyres using sensors located on the wheelsand a receiver located in your vehicle.When the system detects low pressure inthe tyres, a warning message is displayedin the information display. SeeInformation Messages (page 98).If a low pressure warning message isdisplayed in the information display, checkthe tyre pressures as soon as possible andinflate them to the recommendedpressure. See Technical Specifications(page 240). If this happens frequently, havethe cause determined and rectified as soonas possible.

239

Wheels and Tyres

Checking the tyre pressuresNote: If the tyre pressures are greater thanor equal to 3.3 bar (48 lbf/in²), you will seethe + symbol below the pressure value. Thesystem only measures pressure up to 3.3bar (48 lbf/in²). The + symbol indicates thatthe tyre pressures may be higher.Note: Type 3 instrument clusters have aslightly different menu structure. SelectSettings first to access Information.1. Press the right arrow button on the

steering wheel to enter the main menu.2. Highlight Information with the up and

down buttons and press the right arrowbutton.

3. Highlight Tyre Pressures with the upand down buttons and press the rightarrow button.



Setting the vehicle loadNote: Type 3 instrument clusters have aslightly different menu structure. SelectSettings first to access Setup.Correct tyre pressure settings depend onvehicle load. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 240). The systemcan only detect low pressure if you haveentered the current vehicle load.1. Press the right arrow button on the


buttons and press the right arrowbutton.

3. Highlight Tyre Pressures with the upand down buttons and press the rightarrow button.



TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSWheel nut torque

Nm (Ib-ft)Wheel type

140 (103)All

240

Wheels and Tyres

Tyre pressures (cold tyres)Up to 80 km/h (50 mph)

Full loadNormal load

Tyre sizeVariant RearFrontRearFront

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

4.2 (61)4.2 (61)4.2 (61)4.2 (61)T125/90 R 16All

3 (44)3 (44)3 (44)3 (44)215/55 R 16Spare wheel whenit differs from theother fitted wheels

Up to 160 km/h (100mph)



bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.2 (32)205/55 R 16*1.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)

2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)215/55 R 16*

1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LEcoBoost SCTi(MI4), 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V, 2.0LDuratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)

235/45 R18

2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)215/50 R 17


241

Wheels and Tyres



bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

3.1 (45)2.6 (38)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)235/40 R 18


3 (44)2.6 (38)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)235/40 R 19


2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.2 (32)215/55 R 16*2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)

2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.2 (32)215/50 R 17,235/40 R 18,

235/45 R 18 and235/40 R 19

2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 2.3LDuratec-HE (MI4)

*Only fit snow chains to specified tyres.

242

Wheels and Tyres

Continuous speed in excess of 160 km/h (100 mph)



bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

bar (lbf/in²)

2.9 (42)2.5 (36)2.2 (32)2.2 (32)205/55 R 161.6L Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)

3.1 (45)2.6 (38)2.2 (32)2.4 (35)215/55 R 16,235/40 R 18,

235/45 R 18 and235/40 R 19

1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LDuratec-HE (MI4),2.3L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V

3.1 (45)2.6 (38)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)215/50 R 17

1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma), 2.0LDuratec-HE (MI4),2.3L Duratec-HE(MI4) and 1.6LDuratorq-TDCi (DV)Diesel Stage V

3.2 (46)2.9 (42)2.3 (33)2.5 (36)215/55 R 16,235/40 R 18,

235/45 R 18 and235/40 R 19

2.0L EcoBoost SCTi(MI4)

3.2 (46)2.9 (42)2.4 (35)2.5 (36)215/50 R 172.0L EcoBoost SCTi(MI4)

3.1 (45)2.9 (42)2.3 (33)2.5 (36)215/55 R 16,235/40 R 18,

235/45 R 18 and235/40 R 19

2.0L Duratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)

3.1 (45)2.9 (42)2.4 (35)2.5 (36)215/50 R 172.0L Duratorq-TDCi(DW) and 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi(DW)

243

Wheels and Tyres

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONPLATE

Note: The vehicle identification platedesign may vary to that shown.Note: The information shown on the vehicleidentification plate is dependant uponmarket requirements.

E135662

B C ED

F

G

H

I

A

ModelAVariantBEngine designationCEmission levelDVehicle identification numberEGross vehicle weightFGross train weightGMaximum front axle weightHMaximum rear axle weightI

The vehicle identification number andmaximum weights are shown on a platelocated on the lock side of the right-handdoor aperture at the bottom.

244

Vehicle identification

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER

E87496

The vehicle identification number isstamped into the floor panel on theright-hand side, beside the front seat. It isalso shown on the left-hand side of theinstrument panel.

245

Vehicle identification

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSVehicle dimensions4-door

Dimension in mm (inches)Dimension description

4850 (190.9)Maximum length - without bumper styling kit

4866 (191.6)Maximum length - with bumper styling kit

2092 (82.4)Overall width including exterior mirrors

1460 - 1500 (57.5 - 59.1)Overall height - EC kerb weight

2850 (112.2)Wheelbase

1579 - 1589 (62.2 - 62.6)Front track

1595 - 1605 (62.8 - 63.2)Rear track

5-door



4800 (189)Maximum length - with bumper styling kit


1460 - 1500 (57.5 - 59.1)Overall height - EC kerb weight


1579 - 1589 (62.2 - 62.6)Front track

1595 - 1605 (62.8 - 63.2)Rear track

Estate



4858 (191.3)Maximum length - with bumper styling kit


246

Capacities and Specifications


1472 - 1512 (58 - 59.5)Overall height - EC kerb weight without roof bars

1508 - 1548 (59.4 - 61)Overall height - EC kerb weight including roof bars


1579 - 1589 (62.2 - 62.6)Front track

1595 - 1605 (62.8 - 63.2)Rear track

Towing equipment dimensions

C

A

FG

D

B

E

E87092

247


4-door

Dimension in mm (inches)Dimension descriptionItem

102 (4)Bumper – end of tow ballA

1 (0.04)Attachment point – centre of tow ballB

1150 (45.3)Wheel centre – centre of tow ballC

438 (17.2)Centre of tow ball – side memberD

876 (34.5)Inner side of side memberE

434 (17.1)Centre of tow ball – centre 1. attachmentpointF

707 (27.8)Centre of tow ball – centre 2. attachmentpointG

5-door


100 (3.9)Bumper – end of tow ballA

98 (3.9)Bumper – end of tow ball (with sportbumper)A


1080 (42.5)Wheel centre – centre of tow ballC



364 (14.3)Centre of tow ball – centre 1. attachmentpointF

637 (25.1)Centre of tow ball – centre 2. attachmentpointG

248


Estate


100 (3.9)Bumper – end of tow ball (without bumperstyling kit)A

95 (3.7)Bumper – end of tow ball (with bumperstyling kit)A

113 (4.4)Bumper – end of tow ball (without bumperstyling kit, with self levelling suspension)A

108 (4.3)Bumper – end of tow ball (with bumperstyling kit, with self levelling suspension)A


1135 - 1140 (44.7 - 44.9)Wheel centre – centre of tow ballC



419 - 429 (16.5 - 16.9)Centre of tow ball – centre 1. attachmentpointF

692 - 702 (27.2 - 27.6)Centre of tow ball – centre 2. attachmentpointG

249


IMPORTANT AUDIOINFORMATION

WARNINGSDue to technical incompatibility,recordable (CD-R) and rewritable(CD-RW) discs may not function

correctly.These units will play compact discsthat conform to the InternationalRed Book standard audio

specification. Copy protected CDs fromsome manufacturers do not conform tothis standard and playback cannot beguaranteed.

Dual format, dual sided discs (DVDPlus, CD-DVD format), adopted bythe music industry, are thicker than

normal CDs and consequently playbackcannot be guaranteed, and jamming couldoccur. Irregular shaped CDs and CDs witha scratch protection film or self adhesivelabels attached should not be used.Warranty claims, where this type of disc isfound to be inside an audio unit returnedfor repair, will not be accepted.

All units except Sony CD (but not the6CD) are designed to playcommercially pressed 12 cm audio

compact discs only. The Sony CD unit willplay 8 cm discs with a Sony approvedadaptor fitted (CSA-8).

The audio unit may be damaged ifunsuitable items like credit cards orcoins are pushed inside the CD

aperture.

Audio unit labels

E66256

E66257

Disc labelsAudio CD

E66254

MP3

E66255

250

Audio introduction

6000CD

QP

O

MN

DE

F

HG

A CB

K IJLE141803

CD aperture. See Loading compact discs (page 265).AOn, off and volume control. See On/off control (page 256).BCD eject. See Ejecting compact discs (page 267).CClock. See Setting the clock and date on the audio unit (page 255).DTraffic announcement. See Traffic information control (page 259).EFolder up.FFolder down.GEnd call. See Telephone (page 272).HInformation. See MP3 display options (page 269).ISeek up. See Station tuning control (page 260).JSeek down. See Station tuning control (page 260).KStation presets. See Station preset buttons (page 258).LAccept call. See Telephone (page 272).MMenu. See Audio menu control (page 256).N

251

Audio unit overview

Bass and treble control. See Bass/treble control (page 256). Balance andfade control. See Balance/fade control (page 256).

O

Radio and waveband select. See Waveband button (page 258).PAuxiliary and CD select. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 270). SeeCompact Disc Player (page 265).

Q

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB

E138370

G

H

I

J

S

R

Q

P

C DA B E F

KMO N L

Scan. See Station tuning control (page 260). See Compact disc trackscanning (page 267).

A

Information. See MP3 display options (page 269).BStation presets. See Station preset buttons (page 258).CCD aperture. See Loading compact discs (page 265).DClock. See Setting the clock and date on the audio unit (page 255).EDSP select. See Digital signal processing (DSP) (page 262).FAutostore. See Autostore control (page 258).GMenu. See Audio menu control (page 256).HTraffic announcement. See Traffic information control (page 259).IOn and off control. See On/off control (page 256).J

252

Audio unit overview

Balance and fade control. See Balance/fade control (page 256).KEnd call. See Telephone (page 272).LVolume control, navigation buttons and select button.MAccept call. See Telephone (page 272).NTone. See Bass/treble control (page 256).OPhone menu. See Telephone (page 272).PRadio and waveband select. See Waveband button (page 258).QAuxiliary and CD select. See Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket (page 270). SeeCompact Disc Player (page 265).

R

CD eject. See Ejecting compact discs (page 267).S

253

Audio unit overview

SECURITY CODEEach unit incorporates a unique code thatmust be entered before the unit willoperate.If the battery is disconnected or if the unithas been removed from the vehicle, thecode must be re-entered before the unitwill operate.

LOST SECURITY CODEIf you lose the unique code, contact yourdealer and supply details of your audio unitalong with some proof of identity.

ENTERING A SECURITY CODEIf CODE - - - -, CODE 0000 or ENTERKEYCODE appears in the display whenyou switch on the audio unit, you mustenter the unique code using the stationpreset buttons.

6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB1. Using the station preset buttons enter

the unique code.2. If you make a mistake entering the

code, re-enter the digits by continuingto select buttons 0-9. The display willadvance from digit position 1 to 4 andthen back again.

3. Make sure that the complete code iscorrect before pressing either the *preset button or the button betweenthe navigation buttons to confirm yourselection.

INCORRECT SECURITY CODEUp to a maximum of 10 unique code entryattempts are allowed with variousconsequences if you get it wrong.

The number of attempts will be shown inthe display.If the display reverts to CODE anotherentry attempt may be made immediately.If the display shows WAIT 30, the unit willbe locked for 30 minutes. Wait until thetimer counts down to zero. When CODE isshown in the display, enter the correctcode.Note: After 10 incorrect attempts the unitwill be permanently inoperative andLOCKED will be shown in the display. Seeyour dealer.

254

Audio System Security

SETTING THE CLOCK ANDDATE ON THE AUDIO UNIT6000CDChanging the date and timePress the CLOCK button to display thedate and time.Note: If you do not press another buttonwithin 30 seconds of pressing the CLOCKbutton, the display will return to its previoussetting.1. Using the seek up or seek down button

select the date or time value that youwish to change. The selected value willflash in the display.

2. Rotate the volume control to changethe selected date or time value.

3. Using the seek up or seek down buttonselect additional date or time valuesthat you wish to change.

4. Rotate the volume control to changethe selected date or time value.

5. Press the CLOCK button to exit andsave your settings.

Note: If you do not press the CLOCK buttonwithin 30 seconds of changing a date ortime value, the display will exit and save thenew values automatically.Note: Press and hold the CLOCK buttonfor more than two seconds to automaticallyselect the hour value for winter or summertime adjustment.

12/24 hour format1. Press the MENU button repeatedly

until the 12/24 icon is shown in thedisplay.

2. Using the seek up or seek down buttonselect your required setting.

3. Press the MENU button repeatedly orallow the system to time out to confirmyour selection.

Sony and Sony DABChanging the date and time1. Press the CLOCK button.2. Press the left or right navigation button

until the date or time value that youwish to change flashes in the display.

3. Using the up or down navigation buttonchange the selected date or time value.

4. Using the left and right navigationbuttons select additional date or timevalues that you wish to change. Theselected value will flash in the display.

5. Repeat steps three and four asnecessary.

6. Press the CLOCK button or the buttonbetween the navigation buttons to exitand save your settings.

12/24 hour format1. Press the MENU button.2. Press the up or down navigation button

until the 12/24 icon is shown in thedisplay.

3. Using the left or right navigation buttonselect the required setting.

4. Press the MENU button or the buttonbetween the navigation buttons toconfirm your selection.

255

Audio Unit Clock and Date Displays

ON/OFF CONTROLPress the on/off control. This will alsooperate the unit for up to one hour with theignition turned off.The radio will switch off automaticallyafter one hour.

BASS/TREBLE CONTROLThe bass function is used to adjust thelow-frequency response of the audio unit.The middle function is used to adjust themid-frequency response of the audio unit.The treble function is used to adjust thehigh-frequency response of the audio unit.

6000CDNote: The selected level will be shown inthe display.1. Press the SOUND button once for

bass, twice for middle or three timesfor treble.

2. Use the volume control or on someunits the seek up or seek down buttonto make the necessary adjustment.

Sony and Sony DABNote: You can adjust these settingsseparately for CD, Radio and Aux.Note: The selected level will be shown inthe display.1. Press the TONE button once for bass,

twice for middle or three times fortreble.

2. Use the up and down navigationbuttons to make the necessaryadjustment.

BALANCE/FADE CONTROLThe balance function is used to adjust thesound distribution between the left andright speakers.The fade function is used to adjust thesound distribution from front to rear invehicles fitted with rear speakers.

6000CDPress the SOUND button four times forbalance or five times for fade.Use the volume control or on some unitsthe seek up or seek down button to makethe necessary adjustment.

Sony and Sony DABPress the FAD/BAL button once for fadeor twice for balance.Use the up and down navigation buttonsfor fade adjustment, and the left and rightnavigation buttons for balance adjustment.The selected level will be shown in thedisplay.

AUDIO MENU CONTROLUse the MENU button to access functionsthat cannot be selected directly via one ofthe control buttons. Press the MENUbutton for first level functions, or press andhold the MENU button for other secondlevel functions (not available on Sony orSony DAB audio units).

256

Audio unit operation

6000CD

Menu functions

Second levelFirst level

During all functionsDuring CD playbackDuring tape playbackDuring radio recep-tion

Traffic local ordistant

Scan12/24 hourManual tuning

AF**ShuffleAVC*Scan tuning

REGRepeatADV menu12/24 hour

NewsComp-AVC*

CLIP12/24 hour-ADV menu

VIDAVC*--

Bluetooth enable/disable

ADV menu--

Note: The sequence in which functions appear may vary for different audio units andvehicles.Note: Second level functions (advanced) can also be entered by selecting ADV menu fromthe first level menu.*Automatic volume control.** Alternative frequencies.

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB

Menu functions

During CD playbackDuring radio reception

12/24 hour12/24 hour

CLIP ON/OFFCLIP ON/OFF

News ON/OFFNews ON/OFF

AVC1AVC1

AF2AF2

257


Menu functions

During CD playbackDuring radio reception

TA3 volumeTA3 volume

Traffic local or distantTraffic local or distant

ShuffleRegional ON/OFF

Repeat-

Comp ON/OFF-Note: The sequence in which functions appear may vary for different audio units andvehicles.1Automatic volume control.2Alternative frequencies.3Traffic announcement.

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB withBluetoothPressing PHONE followed by the MENUbutton will access the following options:• No active phone or Active phone• Debond BT device• Reject calls ON/OFF• Bluetooth ON/OFF.

STATION PRESET BUTTONSThis feature allows you to store yourfavourite stations so that they can berecalled by selecting the appropriatewaveband and pressing one of the presetbuttons.1. Select a waveband.2. Tune to the station required.3. Press and hold one of the preset

buttons. The audio unit will mute.When sound returns the station hasbeen stored.

This can be repeated on each wavebandand for each preset button.Note: When you drive to another part of thecountry, FM RDS (Radio Data System)stations that broadcast on alternativefrequencies are stored on the presetbuttons.

WAVEBAND BUTTONNote: The selector can also be used toreturn to radio reception when you havebeen listening to another source.Press the RADIO button to select from thewavebands available.

AUTOSTORE CONTROLNote: This function will overwrite thepreviously stored autostore preset stations.Note: This function can also be used tostore stations manually in the same way asother wavebands.Note: The strongest signals available onthe selected waveband will be stored.

258


The sound is muted and AUTOSTORE willbe shown in the display while the unitsearches through the frequencies.When the search is complete, sound isrestored and the strongest signals arestored on the autostore presets.

6000CDPress and hold the RADIO button.

Sony CDPress and hold the AST or RADIO button.

TRAFFIC INFORMATIONCONTROLMany stations that broadcast on the FMwaveband have a TP code to signify thatthey carry traffic programme information.

Activating traffic announcementsBefore you can receive trafficannouncements, you must press the TAbutton. Either TA-D or TA-L will be shownin the display to indicate that the featureis switched on.If you are already tuned to a station thatbroadcasts traffic information, TP will alsobe shown in the display. Otherwise the unitwill search for a traffic programme anddisplay TP SEEK while doing so. If it cannotlocate such a station, NOT FOUND will beshown in the display.TP will be shown within a box in the displaywhen you are tuned to a station providingtraffic information from a linked RDS (radiodata system) or EON (enhanced othernetwork) station.When traffic information is broadcast, itwill automatically interrupt normal radio,tape or CD playback and TRAFFIC orNEWS will be shown in the display.

If the traffic signal weakens, TP will flashin the display. Press the seek up or seekdown button (the left or right navigationbutton on Sony or Sony DAB audio units)to find another station.Note: If this happens during CD or AUXplayback or, on certain models, with theradio volume set to zero, the unit will retuneautomatically if the station is not available.If a non-traffic station is selected orrecalled using a preset button, the audiounit will remain on that station unless TAis turned off, then on again.Note: If TA is on and you select a preset ormanual tune to a non TA station no trafficannouncement will be heard.

Local or distant trafficThe number of RDS or EON trafficannouncements may become excessivein some areas so there is an option toselect between local traffic informationand all available information.

6000CD1. Press and hold the MENU button until

the display changes.2. Press the MENU button repeatedly

until TA is shown in the display.3. Press the seek up or seek down button

to select either local (TA LOCAL) ordistant (TA DIST) trafficannouncements.

4. Press the MENU button or allow themenu to time out to confirm yourselection.

Note: Either TA-L or TA-D will be shown inthe display.

259


Sony CD1. Press the MENU button and use the

up or down navigation button to selectthe TA display.

2. Press the left or right navigation buttonto select your required setting.

3. Press the MENU button to confirmyour selection.

Traffic announcement volumeTraffic announcements interrupt normalbroadcasts at a preset minimum level thatis usually louder than normal listeningvolumes.

To adjust the preset volume6000CD1. Press and hold the TA button.2. Rotate the volume control to make the

necessary adjustment.Note: The selected level will be shown inthe display.

Sony CD1. Press and hold the TA button.2. Press the left or right navigation button

to make the necessary adjustment.Note: The selected level will be shown inthe display.

Ending traffic announcementsThe audio unit will return to normaloperation at the end of each trafficannouncement. To end the announcementprematurely, press TA during theannouncement.Note: If you press TA at any other time itwill switch all announcements off.

STATION TUNING CONTROLDAB service linkingNote: The DAB service linking is as perdefault off.Note: Service linking allowscross-referencing to other correspondingfrequencies of the same station, for exampleFM and other DAB ensembles.Note: The system will automaticallychange to another corresponding station ifthe current one becomes unavailable, forexample when leaving the coverage area.

Switching DAB service linking on andoff1. Press the MENU button.2. Using the up or down navigation button

scroll through the display until DIGITALRADIO SERVICE LINK is shown in thedisplay.

3. Using the left or right navigation buttonselect AUTO or OFF.


Seek tuning6000CDSelect a waveband and briefly press theseek up or seek down button. The unit willstop at the first station it finds in thedirection you have chosen.

Sony CDSelect a waveband and briefly press theup or down navigation button. The unit willstop at the first station it finds in thedirection you have chosen.

260


Manual tuning6000CD1. Select a waveband and press the

MENU button until MAN is shown inthe display.

2. Press the seek up or seek down buttonto tune up or down the waveband insmall increments or press and hold toincrement quickly, until you find astation you want to listen to.

Sony CDSelect a waveband and briefly press theup or down navigation button to tune upor down the waveband in smallincrements. The display shows thefrequency selected.

Sony DABNote: Ensembles are groups of stations.Briefly press the up or down navigationbutton to move up or down the ensembles.

Scan tuningThe SCAN function allows you to listen to10 seconds of each station detected.

6000CD1. Press the MENU button repeatedly

until SCAN is shown in the display.2. Press the seek up or seek down button

to scan up or down the selectedwaveband.

3. Depending on the audio unit, press theseek up or seek down button or theMENU button to continue listening toa station.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the SCAN button. SCAN flashes

or SCANNING is shown in the display.2. Press the left or right navigation button

to scan within a waveband.3. Press SCAN again to continue listening

to a station.

261


AUTOMATIC VOLUMECONTROLWhen available, automatic volume control(AVC) adjusts the volume level tocompensate for engine noise and roadspeed noise.

All except Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the MENU button repeatedly

until AVC is shown in the display.2. Use the seek up or seek down button

to adjust the AVC setting.3. Press the MENU button or allow the

system to time out to confirm yourselection.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the MENU button briefly.2. Using the up or down navigation button

select AVC.3. Press the MENU button or allow the


DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING(DSP)DSP occupancyThis feature takes into account thedifferences in distance from the variousspeakers in the vehicle to each seat. Selectthe sitting position for which the audio isto be correctly enhanced.

DSP equaliserSelect the music category that most suitsyour listening preference. The audio outputwill change to enhance the particular styleof music chosen.

Changing the DSP settings1. Press the DSP button once for

occupancy and twice for equaliser. Foritem location: See Audio unitoverview (page 251).

2. Use the up and down navigationbuttons to select the required setting.

3. Press the button between thenavigation buttons to confirm yourselection.

AUDIO DISTORTIONREDUCTION (CLIP)When available CLIP automatically detectssound distortion and reduces the volumelevel until the distortion has beeneliminated. This means that whilst thedisplay might change numerically whenyou raise the volume manually with thecontrol, there may be no actual increasein sound.

All except Sony and Sony DAB1. Press and hold the MENU button until


until CLIP is shown in the display.3. Using the seek up or seek down button

turn the function on or off.4. Press the MENU button or allow the



select CLIP.3. Press the MENU button or allow the


262

Audio unit menus

ALTERNATIVE FREQUENCIESMany programmes broadcast on the FMwaveband have a programmeidentification (PI) code, which can berecognised by audio units.If your radio has alternative frequencies(AF) tuning switched on and you movefrom one transmission area to another, thisfunction will search for and switch to astronger station signal, if one can be found.Under certain conditions, however, AFtuning may temporarily disrupt normalreception.When selected, the unit continuallyevaluates signal strength and, if a bettersignal becomes available, the unit willswitch to that alternative. It mutes whileit checks a list of alternative frequenciesand, if necessary, it will search once acrossthe selected waveband for a genuinealternative frequency.It will restore radio reception when it findsone or, if one is not found, the unit willreturn to the original stored frequency. Oncertain units, NOT FOUND will be shownin the display.With AF-MAN selected, the unit operatesin a similar way to AF-AUTO or AF-ON, butonly searches for an alternative frequencywhen prompted by pressing a presetbutton.With AF-OFF selected, the original storedfrequency remains selected. In this mode,AF-OFF will be displayed every time theunit is turned on.



until AF is shown in the display.

3. Using the seek up or seek down buttonselect the required setting.

4. Press the MENU button or allow thesystem to time out to confirm yourselection.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the MENU button briefly.2. Using the left or right navigation button

select the required setting.3. Press the MENU button to confirm

your selection.

REGIONAL MODE (REG)Regional mode (REG) controls thebehaviour of AF switching betweenregionally related networks of a parentbroadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairlylarge network across a large part of thecountry. At various times of the day thislarge network may be broken down into anumber of smaller regional networks,typically centred on major towns or cities.When the network is not split into regionalvariants, the whole network caries thesame programming.Regional mode ON: This prevents 'random'AF switches when neighbouring regionalnetworks are not carrying the sameprogramming.Regional mode OFF: This allows a largercoverage area if neighbouring regionalnetworks are carrying the sameprogramming, but can cause 'random' AFswitches if they are not.



until REG is shown in the display.

263

Audio unit menus

3. Using the seek up or seek down buttonturn the function on or off.

4. Press the MENU button or allow thesystem to time out to confirm yourselection.


select REGIONAL.3. Press the MENU button or allow the


NEWS BROADCASTSSome audio units interrupt normalreception to broadcast news bulletins fromstations on the FM waveband or radio datasystem (RDS) and enhanced othernetwork (EON) linked stations, in the sameway as traffic information is provided.During news broadcasts, the displayalternates between the station name andNEWS. News interrupts are broadcast atthe same preset volume level as trafficannouncements.


NEWS is shown in the display.2. Using the seek up or seek down button

turn the function on or off.3. Press the MENU button to confirm

your selection.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the MENU button.2. Using the up or down navigation button

scroll through the display until NEWSis shown in the display.

3. Press the button between thenavigation buttons to make yourselection.

4. Using the left or right navigation buttonturn the function on or off.


264

Audio unit menus

LOADING COMPACT DISCS6000CD, Sony and Sony DABAlways check that the CD aperture isempty before inserting a CD.Insert a CD, label side up, into the audiounit.LOADING, READING CD and AUDIO CDor MP3 CD will be shown in the display,and playback will start automatically.

TRACK SELECTIONAll except Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the SEEK UP button once to

move to the next track or press itrepeatedly to access later tracks.

2. Press the SEEK DOWN button onceto replay the current track. If pressedwithin two seconds of the start of atrack, the previous track will beselected.

3. Press the SEEK DOWN buttonrepeatedly to select previous tracks.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the up navigation button once to

move to the next track or press itrepeatedly to access later tracks.

2. Press the down navigation button onceto replay the current track. If pressedwithin two seconds of the start of atrack, the previous track will beselected.

3. Press the down navigation buttonrepeatedly to select previous tracks.

LOADING THE COMPACT DISCCHANGER

CAUTIONSDo not insert more than one disc intoeach slot.Keep the door closed when themagazine is installed.

Note: The unit will only accept conventionalCD's.For item location: See CD changer (page131).

E66144

1. Open the door.2. Press the button.3. Remove the magazine.4. Insert a disc, with the label facing

upwards, into each slot. You will heara distinct click to confirm correctloading.

5. Install the magazine in the directionindicated by the arrow on themagazine. You will hear a distinct clickto confirm correct loading.

6. Close the door.

265

Compact Disc Player

UNLOADING THE COMPACTDISC CHANGER

CAUTIONKeep the door closed when themagazine is installed.

1. Open the door.2. Press the button.3. Remove the magazine.4. Pull the tray out using the lever on the

side.5. Remove the CD and close the tray.6. Repeat steps four and five to remove

remaining CD's.7. Install the magazine in the direction

indicated by the arrow on themagazine. You will hear a distinct clickto confirm correct loading.

8. Close the door.

COMPACT DISC PLAYBACKNote: During playback, the display indicatesthe disc, track and time that has elapsedsince the start of the track.Note: On CD changer audio units, if two ormore CD's are loaded one after the other,playback will start with the last CD loaded.During radio reception, press the CD/AUXbutton once to start CD playback.Playback will start immediately after a discis loaded.

Compact disc changer playbackPress the CD/AUX button twice to startCD playback.Note: If the CD/AUX button is pressedwhen no discs are loaded, NO CDS will beshown in the display.

FAST FORWARD/REVERSEAll except Sony and Sony DABPress and hold the seek up or the seekdown button to search forwards orbackwards within the tracks on the disc.

Sony and Sony DABPress and hold the left or right navigationbutton to search forwards or backwardswithin the tracks on the disc.

SHUFFLE/RANDOMRandom track playback, also known asshuffle, plays all tracks on a CD in randomorder.

6000CDNote: When SHUFF CD is selected only thetracks on the current CD will be shuffled.When SHUF ALL is selected the tracks onall the CD's will be shuffled.1. Press the MENU button repeatedly

until SHUF is shown in the display.2. Using the seek up or seek down button

scroll through the display until SHUFALL or SHUFF CD is shown in thedisplay.

3. Using the seek up or seek down buttonselect the next track to shuffle ifrequired.

Note: With the function on, SHUFFLE willbe shown in the display as each new trackis selected.

266

Compact Disc Player

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB1. Press the MENU button.2. Using the up or down navigation button

scroll through the display untilSHUFFLE is shown in the display.

3. Use the left or right navigation buttonto switch the function on and off.

Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SHUFF CD for the whole CD, orSHUF ALL to play all the tracks in the folderin a random order.

COMPACT DISC TRACKCOMPRESSIONWith this feature on, quieter music isboosted and louder music lowered tominimise repeated volume adjustments.

All except Sony and Sony DAB1. Press MENU repeatedly until COMP is

shown in the display.2. Using the seek up or seek down button

turn the function on or off.3. Press the MENU button to confirm

your selection.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the MENU button.2. Using the up or down navigation button

scroll through the display until COMPis shown in the display.

3. Press the button between thenavigation buttons to make yourselection.

4. Using the left or right navigation buttonturn the function on or off.


COMPACT DISC TRACKSCANNINGThe SCAN function allows you to previeweach track for approximately 10 seconds.

6000CDNote: When selected, SCAN will be shownbriefly in the display at the start of eachtrack.1. Press the MENU button repeatedly

until SCAN is shown in the display.2. Using the seek up or seek down button

select either SCAN CD or SCAN ALL.3. Press the seek up or seek down button

again to continue listening to a track.

Sony and Sony DABNote: Various scan modes are possible,according to the type of CD currentlyplaying.1. Press the SCAN button once to scan

each track on an audio CD, or the first10 seconds of each track on each folderof a MP3 CD.

2. Press the SCAN button again to selectSCAN OFF (audio CD), or in the caseof MP3 to scan each track within afolder.

EJECTING COMPACT DISCSNote: Radio reception is restoredautomatically when the EJECT button ispressed.Note: If the EJECT button is pressed inerror, press the button again to cancel.Note: If the CD is not removed it will bepulled back into the audio unit.

267

Compact Disc Player

6000CDPress the EJECT button at any time andremove the CD.

Sony CDNote: If no CD is loaded when the EJECTbutton is pressed, NO CD will be shown inthe display.Press the EJECT button at any time andremove the CD. EJECTING and PLEASEREMOVE will be shown in the display.

REPEAT COMPACT DISCTRACKS6000CD1. Press the MENU button repeatedly

until REPEAT is shown in the display.2. Using the SEEK UP or SEEK DOWN

button choose between OFF and TRK.

Sony and Sony DAB1. Press the MENU button.2. using the up or down navigation

buttons scroll through the display untilREPEAT is shown in the display.

3. Using the left or right navigationbuttons select REPEAT TRACK orREPEAT OFF.

4. Press the MENU button to confirmyour selection.

Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, playbackoptions are REPEAT TRACK, REP FOLDERand REPEAT OFF.

MP3 FILE PLAYBACKNote: Some copy protected audio files maynot be read by the CD player.The CD player also supports MP3 andWMA format audio files.

When a CD containing audio is insertedinto the CD player the disc's directorystructure is read in. It may take a whilebefore playback starts and is dependanton the quality of the disc.MP3 tracks may be recorded on the CD inseveral ways. They can all be placed in theroot directory like a conventional audio CD,or they can be placed in folders that mayrepresent, for example, an album, an artist,or a genre.

6000CDPress the FOLDER UP button to select thenext music folder on the MP3 disc.Press the FOLDER DOWN button to selectthe previous music folder on the MP3 disc.

Sony and Sony DABUse the up and down navigation buttonsto select the next or previous music folderon the MP3 disc.

Playing a multi session discThe normal playing sequence on CD's withmultiple folders is to play the tracks in thefirst folder, then the tracks in any foldersnested inside the first folder, then moveonto the second folder, and so on. Forexample, if folder 1 has folders 1a and 1bwithin it, and folder 2 contains folder 2a,the playing sequence will be folder 1, 1a, 1b,2, 2a.When the playback of a file is finished theplayback of the other files in the samedirectory continues. Directory change takesplace automatically when all files in thecurrent directory have been played back.

268

Compact Disc Player

MP3 DISPLAY OPTIONSWhen an MP3 disc is playing, certaininformation encoded in each track can bedisplayed. Such information will normallyinclude:• The file name• The folder name• ID3 information which might be the

album or artist’s name.The unit will normally show the file namethat is playing. To select one of the otheritems of information, press the INFObutton repeatedly until the required itemis shown in the display.Note: If the ID3 information selected isunavailable, NO MP3 TAG will be shown inthe display.

CD text display optionsWhen an audio disc with CD text is playing,limited information encoded in each trackcan be displayed. Such information willnormally include:• The disc name• The artist name• The track name.Note: These display options are selectedin the same way as MP3 displays. NO DISCNAME or NO TRACK NAME will be shownin the display if no information has beenencoded.

ENDING COMPACT DISCPLAYBACKPress the RADIO button.Note: This will not eject the CD; the discwill merely pause at the point where radioreception was restored.To resume CD playback, press theCD/AUX button again.

269

Compact Disc Player

Note: For optimum performance whenusing any auxiliary device set the volume onthe device high. This will reduce audiointerference when charging the device viathe vehicle power supply socket.When fitted the Auxiliary input (AUX IN)socket permits an auxiliary device, such asan MP3 player, to be linked into the vehicleaudio system. Output can be playedthrough the vehicle speakers.To connect an auxiliary device, plug it intothe AUX IN socket using a 3.5 mmconventional audio jack connector.Select the auxiliary input via the CD/AUXbutton and playback will be heard throughthe vehicle speakers. AUX will be shown inthe display. Volume, treble and bass canbe adjusted on the audio unit as normal.The audio unit buttons can also be usedto restore playback from the audio unit,while the auxiliary device remainsconnected.

270

Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket

AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING

RectificationAudio unit display

General error message for CD fault conditions, forexample cannot read the CD, data-CD inserted. Mayalso indicate a audio unit malfunction. Make sure thatthe disc is correctly loaded, clean and re- load the CDor replace the CD with a known music CD. See Ejectingcompact discs (page 267). See Loading compactdiscs (page 265). If error continues. See your dealer.

CD ERRORPLEASE CHECK CD

CDC ERROR

Message to indicate that the audio unit or CD changeris empty. Insert a CD. See Loading compact discs(page 265).

NO CDNO CDSNO CD #

Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work untilit has cooled down.

HIGH TEMPCD DRIVE HIGH TEMP

Message to indicate that the CD slot is already loaded.Eject the CD from selected slot before attempting loadoperation or select another slot location. See Loadingcompact discs (page 265).

SLOT FULL

Message to indicate that the audio unit is full. SeeEjecting compact discs (page 267).CDC FULL

An incompatible CD has been inserted, for example notan audio CD. See Ejecting compact discs (page 267).DATA CD

Message to prompt you for the Keycode. See Enteringa security code (page 254).CODE ----

Message to inform you to wait until the next keycodeentry attempt can be made. See Incorrect securitycode (page 254).

WAIT

Message indicates the number of incorrect inputattempts. See Incorrect security code (page 254).TRIES

Message to inform you that audio unit security systemhas locked the unit after repeated incorrect keycodeentries. See your dealer.

LOCKED

Message to prompt you for the Keycode. See Enteringa security code (page 254).

KEYCODE....ENTER KEYCODE....

Message to inform you that the entered keycode isincorrect. See Incorrect security code (page 254).INCORRECT

271

Audio Troubleshooting

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTIONUsing the system with the engine offwill drain the battery.

This section describes the functions andfeatures of the Bluetooth mobile phonehands free system.The Bluetooth mobile phone part of thesystem provides interaction with the audioor navigation system and your mobilephone. It allows you to use the audio ornavigation system to make and receivecalls without having to hold your mobilephone.

Compatibility of phonesCAUTION

As no common agreement exists,mobile phone manufacturers are ableto implement a variety of profiles in

their Bluetooth devices. Because of this,an incompatibility can occur between thephone and hands-free system, which insome cases may significantly degrade thesystem performance. To avoid thissituation, only recommended phonesshould be used.

Please visit the website www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for full details.

TELEPHONE SETUPPhonebookAfter start up access to the phonebook listcan be delayed for several minutes,depending upon the size.

Phonebook categoriesDepending on your phonebook entry,different categories can be displayed inthe audio unit.For example:

MobileM

OfficeO

HomeH

FaxF

Note: Entries may be displayed without acategory attachment.The category can also be indicated as anicon:

E87990

Phone

E87991

Mobile

E87992

Home

E87993

Office

E87994

Fax

Making a phone an active phoneWhen using the system for the first time,no phone is connected to the system.

Bluetooth phoneAfter bonding a Bluetooth phone to thesystem, this becomes the active phone.For further information refer to the phonemenu.

272

Telephone

Select the phone from the active phonemenu.Turning the ignition and radio or navigationunit back on again, the last active phoneis picked up by the system.Note: In some cases the Bluetoothconnection must also be confirmed on thephone.

Bond another Bluetooth phoneBond a new Bluetooth phone as describedin the requirements for a Bluetoothconnection.Phones stored in the system are accessibleby using the phone list on the audio unit.Note: A maximum of six devices may bebonded. If six Bluetooth devices havealready been bonded, one of these has tobe debonded in order to bond a new device.

BLUETOOTH SETUPBefore you can use your telephone withyour vehicle it must be bonded to thevehicle telephone system.

Handling of phonesUp to six Bluetooth devices can be bondedto the vehicle system.Note: If there is an ongoing call when thephone in use is selected as the new activephone, the call is transferred to the vehicleaudio system.Note: Even if connected to the car system,your phone can still be used in the usualway.

Requirements for BluetoothconnectionThe following are required before aBluetooth phone connection can be made.

1. The Bluetooth feature must beactivated on the phone and on theaudio unit. Make sure the Bluetoothmenu option in the audio unit is set toON. For information on phone settings,refer to your phone user guide.

2. In the Bluetooth menu on your phone,search for Ford Audio and select it.

3. Enter the code number shown on thevehicle display using the phone keypad.If no code number is shown on thedisplay, enter the Bluetooth PINnumber 0000 using the phone keypad.Now enter the Bluetooth PIN numbershown on the vehicle display.

4. If your mobile phone asks you toauthorize the automatic connection,select YES.

Note: A phone call will be disconnected ifthe audio unit is switched off. If the ignitionkey is turned to the off position the phonecall will remain in progress.

TELEPHONE CONTROLSRemote controlVoice, accept and reject button

E876622

1

Voice button1Accept and reject button2

The VOICE button is used to activate orswitch off the Voice control.

273

Telephone

On vehicles with an accept and rejectbutton, phone calls can be accepted andrejected by pressing the appropriatebutton.Note: Some audio units have the acceptand reject buttons on the front bezel. Theseoperate in the same way.

USING THE TELEPHONE -VEHICLES WITHOUT:NAVIGATION SYSTEMThis chapter describes the phone functionsof the audio unit.Note: Refer to your audio guide for detailsof the controls.An active phone must be present.Even if connected to the audio unit, yourphone can still be used in the usual way.Note: You can exit the phone menu bypressing any source button CD, AM/FM orAUX.

Making a callDialling a number using voice controlPhone numbers can be dialled using voicecontrol. See Telephone commands(page 289).

Dialling a number using the addressbookYou can access your phone address bookvia Bluetooth. The entries will appear inthe unit display.1. Press the PHONE or the call accept

button.2. Press the MENU button.3. Keep pressing the MENU button until

PHONEBOOK appears.4. Press the seek buttons to select the

desired phone number.

Note: Press and hold the seek button toskip to the next letter in the alphabet.5. Press the PHONE or the call accept

button to dial the selected phonenumber.

Dialling a number using the addressbook - Sony radioYou can access your phone address bookvia Bluetooth. The entries will appear inthe unit display.1. Press the PHONE button.2. Press the seek button until the phone

book is shown.3. Press the up/down arrow buttons to

select the desired phone number.Note: Press and hold the up/down arrowbuttons to skip to the next letter in thealphabet.4. Press the PHONE or the call accept

button to dial the selected phonenumber.

Dialling a number using the telephonekeypadIf you have an audio unit with a telephonekeypad (buttons 0-9, * and #):1. Press the call accept button. Press the

PHONE button if you have a Sonyradio.

2. Dial the number using the telephonekeypad on the audio unit.

3. Press the call accept button.Note: If you enter an incorrect digit whilstentering a phone number, press the seek leftbutton to erase the last digit. A long presswill erase the complete string of digits.Press and hold 0 to enter a + digit.

Ending a callCalls can be ended by pressing the callreject button.

274

Telephone

Audio units without a telephone keypadcan also end a call by pressing eitherPHONE, CD, AM/FM or ON/OFF, or bypressing the MODE button on the remotecontrol

Redialling a number1. Press the PHONE or the call accept

button.2. Press the MENU button.3. Select the CALL OUT list or the CALL

IN list. On some audio units, select theMISSED, INCOMING or OUTGOINGcalls list.

Note: If the active phone does not providea call out list, the last outgoing callnumber/entry can be redialled.4. Press the seek button on the audio unit.5. Press the PHONE or the call accept

button to dial the desired phonenumber.

Redialling a number - Sony radio1. Press the PHONE or the call accept

button.2. Press the seek button until the desired

list is displayed.Note: If the active phone does not providea call out list, the last outgoing callnumber/entry can be redialled.3. Press the up/down buttons to select

the desired phone number.4. Press the PHONE or the call accept

button to dial the phone number.

Redialling the last dialled number -Sony radio1. Press the call accept button.2. Press the call accept button a second

time to dial the number.

Receiving an incoming callAccepting an incoming callIncoming calls can be accepted by pressingeither the call accept button, the PHONEbutton or the MODE button on the remotecontrol.

Rejecting an incoming callIncoming calls can be rejected by pressingthe call reject button.Audio units without a telephone keypadcan also reject a call by pressing eitherPHONE, CD, AM/FM or ON/OFF.

Receiving a second incoming callNote: The second incoming call functionmust be activated in your phone.If there is an incoming call whilst there isan ongoing call, a beep will be heard andyou will have the option to end the activecall and to accept the incoming call.

Accepting a second incoming callSecond incoming calls can be acceptedby pressing either the call accept button,the PHONE button, or the MODE buttonon the remote control.

Rejecting a second incoming callSecond incoming calls can be rejected bypressing the call reject button. Unitswithout a telephone keypad can also rejecta second incoming call by pressing the CDbutton, or the AM/FM button.

Muting the microphoneDuring a call, it is possible to mute themicrophone. Whilst muted, confirmationwill appear in the display.

275

Telephone

Audio units with green call acceptbuttonPress the call accept button. Press thebutton once again to turn this function off.

Audio units without green call acceptbuttonPress the seek up or down button. Pressthe button once again to turn this functionoff.

Changing the active phoneNote: Phones must be bonded to thesystem before they can be made active.

Using the station storage buttonNote: This process is only for audio unitswithout a telephone keypad.1. Press the PHONE button on the audio

unit.2. Press the preset number required

(using the station preset buttons 1 - 6).

Using the audio unit menuNote: After bonding a phone to the system,this becomes the active phone.1. Press the PHONE or call accept

button.2. Press the MENU button on the audio

unit.3. Select the ACTIVE PHONE option on

the audio unit.4. Scroll through the different stored

phones by using the seek buttons todisplay the bonded phones.

5. Press the MENU button to select thephone which is to be the active phone.

Debonding a bonded phoneA bonded phone can be deleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.

1. Press the PHONE or call acceptbutton.

2. Press the MENU button on the audiounit.

3. Select the DEBOND option on theaudio unit.

4. Scroll through the different phones byusing the seek buttons and display thephone to be debonded.

5. Press the MENU button to select thephone which is to be debonded.

Debonding a bonded phone - SonyradioA bonded phone can be deleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.1. Press the PHONE button.2. Press the up/down arrow buttons until

you reach the DEBOND option.3. Scroll through the different phones by

using the seek buttons and display thephone to be debonded.

4. Press the OK button to be debond.

USING THE TELEPHONE -VEHICLES WITH: NAVIGATIONSYSTEMThis chapter describes the phone functionsof the Navigation System.Note: Refer to your Navigation Systemguide for details of the controls.An active phone must be present.Even if connected to the NavigationSystem, your phone can still be used in theusual way.

276

Telephone

Making a callDialling a numberPhone numbers can be dialled using voicecontrol. See Voice control (page 279).

Ending a callCalls can be ended by pressing either theEND button, the MODE button on theremote switch or the ON/OFF button onthe navigation system.

Redialling a number1. Press the PHONE button on the unit.2. Select REDIAL.

Receiving an incoming callAccepting an incoming callIncoming calls can be accepted by pressingeither the call accept button, the MODEbutton on the remote control, the PHONEbutton on the unit or by using the ACCEPToption in the menu.

Rejecting an incoming callIncoming calls can be rejected by pressingeither the call reject button, the CD orAM/FM buttons on the unit, or by usingthe REJECT option in the menu.

Receiving a second incoming callNote: The second incoming call functionmust be activated in your phone.If there is an incoming call, whilst there isan ongoing call, a beep will be heard andyou will have the option to end the activecall and to accept the incoming call.

Accepting a second incoming callSecond incoming calls can be acceptedby pressing either the call accept button,the MODE button on the remote control,the PHONE button on the unit or by usingthe ACCEPT option in the menu.Note: This will cancel the ongoing call.

Rejecting a second incoming callSecond incoming calls can be rejected bypressing either the call reject button, or oneof the following buttons on the unit: CD,AM/FM.

Muting the microphoneDuring a call, it is possible to mute themicrophone. Whilst muted, confirmationwill appear in the display.

SD navigation unitsPress the mute button (symbol of amicrophone with a line through it). Pressthe button once again to turn this functionoff.

CD navigation unitsPress the microphone mute button. Pressthe button once again to turn this functionoff.

Changing the active phoneNote: Phones must be bonded to thesystem before they can be made active.Note: After bonding a phone to the system,this becomes the active phone.1. Press the PHONE button on the unit.2. Using the BT SETTINGS option in the

menu, select the active phone from thelist.

277

Telephone

Debonding a bonded phoneA bonded phone can be deleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.1. Press the PHONE button on the unit.2. Select the BT SETTINGS option in the

menu.3. Select the DEBOND option in the

menu.4. Select the phone from the list.

278

Telephone


CAUTIONUsing the system with the engine offwill drain the battery.

Voice recognition enables operation of thesystem without the need to divert yourattention from the road ahead in order tochange settings, or receive feedback fromthe system.Whenever you issue one of the definedcommands with the system active, thevoice recognition system converts yourcommand into a control signal for thesystem. Your inputs take the form ofdialogues or commands. You are guidedthrough these dialogues byannouncements or questions.Please familiarise yourself with thefunctions of the system before using voicerecognition.

Supported commandsThe voice control system allows you tocontrol the following vehicle functions:• Bluetooth phone• radio• CD Player/CD Changer• external device (USB)• external device (iPod)• automatic climate control• navigation system - refer to separate

navigation handbook).

System responseAs you work through a voice session thesystem will prompt you with a beep toneeach time the system is ready to proceed.

Do not try to give any commands until thebeep tone has been heard. The voicecontrol system will repeat each spokencommand back to you.If you are not sure how to continue say"HELP" for assistance or "CANCEL" if youdo not wish to continue.The "HELP" function provides only asubset of the available voice commands.Detailed explanations of all possible voicecommands can be found on the followingpages.

Voice commandsAll voice commands should be given usinga natural speaking voice, as if speaking toa passenger or on the phone. Your voicelevel should be dependant on thesurrounding noise level inside or outsidethe vehicle but do not shout.

USING VOICE CONTROLSystem operationThe order and content of the voice controlsare given in the following lists. The tablesshow the sequence of user voicecommands and system responses for eachavailable function.<> indicates a number or stored name tagto be inserted by the user.

Short cutsThere are a number of voice commandshort cuts available, which allow you tocontrol some vehicle features withouthaving to follow the complete commandmenu. These are:• Phone: CALL or DIAL NAME, DIAL

NUMBER, and REDIAL.• Phone: CALL FIRST NAME, LAST NAME

at LOCATION. Example: Call FredBloggs at home.

279

Voice control

• CD player or CD changer: DISC andTRACK.

• Automatic climate control:TEMPERATURE, AUTO MODE,DEFROSTING ON, DEMISTING ON,DEFROSTING OFF and DEMISTINGOFF.

• Radio: TUNE NAME.• External device (USB, iPod and SD

card): TRACK.

Start communicating with the systemBefore you can start talking to the systemyou first have to press the VOICE or MODEbutton for each operation and wait untilthe system answers with a beep. See(page 279).Press the button again to cancel the voicesession.

Name tagThe name tag functionality can supportthe phone, audio and navigation featuresby using the "STORE NAME" function. Youcan assign name tags to items such asfavourite radio stations and personalphone contacts. See Audio unitcommands (page 280). See Telephonecommands (page 289). See Navigationsystem commands (page 294).• Store up to 20 name tags per function.• The average recording time for each

name tag is approximately 2-3seconds.

AUDIO UNIT COMMANDSCD PlayerYou can control playback directly by voicecontrol.

OverviewThe overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

"CD PLAYER"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT FOLDER"**

280

Voice control

"CD PLAYER"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.

TrackYou can choose a track on your CD directly.

System answerUser saysSteps

"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1

"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"*2

"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"**3

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)

Shuffle allTo set random playback.


"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1

"SHUFFLE ALL"2

CD ChangerOverviewThe overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.

281

Voice control

"CD CHANGER"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"DISC"*

"TRACK"*

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE CD"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT CD"

"REPEAT FOLDER"**

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.

DiscIf you have a CD changer you can choosethe disc number.


"CD CHANGER""CD CHANGER"1

"DISC NUMBER PLEASE""DISC"*2

"DISC <number>""<a number between 1 and 6>"3

* Can be used as a shortcut.

TrackYou can choose a track on your CD directly.

282

Voice control





* Can be used as a shortcut.** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)

Shuffle CDTo set random playback within the CDcontents.



"SHUFFLE CD"2

RadioThe radio voice commands support thefunctionality of the radio and allow you totune radio stations by voice control.

OverviewThe overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu.

"RADIO"

"HELP"

"AM"

"FM"

"TUNE NAME"*

"DELETE NAME"

"DELETE DIRECTORY"

"PLAY DIRECTORY"

283

Voice control

"RADIO"

"STORE NAME"

"PLAY"


Tune frequencyThis function allows you to tune your radioby voice commands.


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"AM FREQUENCY PLEASE""AM"2

"FM FREQUENCY PLEASE""FM"

"TUNE <frequency>""<frequency>"*3

* The frequency may be entered in a variety of ways. Refer below for representativeexamples.

FM band: 87.5 - 108.0 in increments of 0.1• "Eighty nine point nine" (89.9)• "Ninety" (90.0)• "One hundred point five" (100.5)• "One zero one point one" (101.1)• "One zero eight" (108.0)AM/MW band: 531 - 1602 in increments of9AM/LW band: 153 - 281 in increments of 1

• "Five thirty one" (531)• "Nine hundred" (900)• "Fourteen forty" (1440)• "Fifteen zero three" (1503)• "Ten eighty" (1080)

Store nameIf you have tuned a radio station, you canstore it with a name in the directory.


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"

"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3

"STORING NAME""<name>"4

284

Voice control


"<name> STORED"

Tune nameThis function allows you to call up a storedradio station.


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"NAME PLEASE""TUNE NAME"*2

"TUNE <name>""<name>"3


Delete nameThis function allows you to delete a storedradio station.


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2

"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DELETED""YES"4

"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"

Play directoryThis function allows you to let the systemtell you all of the stored radio stations.


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"PLAY <DIRECTORY>""PLAY DIRECTORY"2

285

Voice control

Delete directory This function allows you to delete allstored radio stations at once.


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"RADIO DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3


PlayThis function switches the audio source tothe radio mode.


"RADIO""RADIO"1

"PLAY"2

Auxiliary inputThis function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attached auxiliary inputdevice.


"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1

"LINE IN""LINE IN"2

External devices - USBThese voice commands support thefunctionality of an external USB devicewhich may be connected to the audio unit.


286

Voice control

"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "USB"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"PLAYLIST"**

"FOLDER"**

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE FOLDER"

"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT FOLDER"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Playlists and folders activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames.See General Information (page 297).

USB playThis function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attached USB device.



"USB""USB"2

"PLAY"3

USB TrackYou can choose a track on your USB devicedirectly.

287

Voice control



"USB""USB"2

"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"3

"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"*4

* Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)

External devices - iPodThese voice commands support thefunctionality of an iPod which may beconnected to the audio unit.


"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "IPOD"

"HELP"

"PLAY"

"TRACK"*

"PLAYLIST"**

"SHUFFLE ALL"

"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"

"SHUFFLE OFF"

"REPEAT TRACK"

"REPEAT OFF"

* Can be used as a shortcut.** Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See GeneralInformation (page 297).

iPod TrackYou can choose a track off the all titles listof your iPod directly.

288

Voice control



"IPOD""IPOD"2



* Can be used as a shortcut.** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to five single digits (for example "5", "2","4", "5", "3" for track 52453), to a limit of 65535.

iPod playlistYou can choose a playlist from your iPoddirectly.



"IPOD""IPOD"2

"PLAYLIST NUMBER PLEASE""PLAYLIST"*3

"PLAYLIST <number>""<a number between 1 and 10>"4

* Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames. See GeneralInformation (page 297).

TELEPHONE COMMANDSPhoneYour phone system allows you to createan additional phonebook. The storedentries can be dialled by voice control.Phone numbers stored by using voicecontrol are stored on the vehicle systemand not in your phone.


289

Voice control

"PHONE"

"HELP"

"MOBILE NAME"*

"DIAL NUMBER"*

"DIAL NAME"*

"DELETE NAME"

"DELETE DIRECTORY"

"PLAY DIRECTORY"

"STORE NAME"

"REDIAL"*

"ACCEPT CALLS"

"REJECT CALLS"


Phone functionsDial numberPhone numbers can be dialled after givingthe name tag voice command.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NUMBER PLEASE""DIAL NUMBER"*2

"<phone number>"<phone number>"3CONTINUE?"

"DIALLING""DIAL"4

"<repeat last part of number>"CORRECTION"CONTINUE?"


290

Voice control

Dial name Phone numbers can be dialled after givingthe name tag voice command.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NAME PLEASE""DIAL NAME"*2

"DIAL <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIALLING""YES"4



RedialThis function allows you to redial the lastdialled phone number.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"REDIAL""REDIAL"*2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIALLING""YES"3



Mobile nameThis function allows you to access phonenumbers stored with a name tag in yourmobile phone.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"MOBILE NAME" "<phonedependent dialogue>""MOBILE NAME"*2


291

Voice control

DTMF (Tone dialling)This function transfers spoken numbersinto DTMF tones. For example, to make aremote enquiry to your home answeringmachine or to enter a PIN number etc.

Note: DTMF can only be used during anongoing call. Operate the VOICE button andwait for the system prompt.Can only be used with vehicles installed witha dedicated VOICE button.


"NUMBER PLEASE"1

"<numbers 1 to 9, zero, hash, star>"2

Create a phonebookStore nameNew entries can be stored with the"STORE NAME" command. This featurecan be used to dial a number by calling upthe name instead of the full phone number.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"

"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3

"STORING NAME""<name>"4"<name> STORED""NUMBER PLEASE"

"<phone number>""<phone number>"5

"STORING NUMBER""STORE"6"<phone number>""NUMBER STORED"

Delete nameStored names can also be deleted fromthe directory.

292

Voice control


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2

"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"<name> DELETED""YES"4


Play directoryUse this function to let the system tell youall stored entries.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"PLAY DIRECTORY""PLAY DIRECTORY"2

Delete directoryThis function allows you to delete allentries in one go.


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"

"DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3


Main settingsReject callsCalls can be set to be automaticallyrejected using voice control.

293

Voice control


"PHONE""PHONE"1

"REJECT CALLS""REJECT CALLS"2

"ACCEPT CALLS""ACCEPT CALLS"*

* use this command to turn the reject mode off

NAVIGATION SYSTEMCOMMANDSPlease refer to your separate Navigationmanual for details of the command menus.

CLIMATE CONTROLCOMMANDSClimateThe climate voice commands supports thefunctionality of the fan speed, temperatureand mode settings. Not all functions areavailable on all vehicles.


"CLIMATE"

"HELP"

"FAN"*

"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON"*

"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"*

"TEMPERATURE"*

"AUTO MODE"*

* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the "FAN"shortcut is not available.

294

Voice control

Fan This function allows you to adjust the fanspeed.


"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"FAN SPEED PLEASE""‘FAN"*2

"FAN MINIMUM""MINIMUM"

3 "FAN <number>""<a number between 1 and 7>"

"FAN MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"

* Can be used as a shortcut. On vehicles fitted with an English language module the "FAN"shortcut is not available.

Defrosting/Demisting


"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING ON""DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING

ON"*

2"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING

OFF""DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING

OFF"*


TemperatureThis function allows you to adjust thetemperature.


"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"TEMPERATURE PLEASE""TEMPERATURE"*2

"TEMPERATURE MINIMUM""MINIMUM"3

295

Voice control


"TEMPERATURE <number>""<a number between 15 and 29 °C

with 0.5 increments>" or "<anumber between 59 and 84 °F>"

"TEMPERATURE MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"


Auto mode


"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1

"AUTO MODE""AUTO MODE"*2

* Can be used as a shortcut. Can be deactivated by selecting a different temperature orfan speed.

296

Voice control

GENERAL INFORMATION

CAUTIONSTake care when handling externaldevices with exposed electricalconnectors (such as the USB plug).

Always replace the protective cap/shieldwhen possible. There may be a risk ofelectrostatic discharge causing damageto the device.

Do not touch or handle the USBsocket in the vehicle. Cover the socketwhen not in use.Only use USB Mass-Storage devicecompliant devices.Always switch your audio unit to adifferent source (for example theradio) before unplugging the USB

device.Do not install or connect USB hubs orsplitters.

Note: The system is only designed torecognize and read suitable audio files froma USB device that conforms to the USBMass-Storage device class or an iPod. Notall available USB devices can be guaranteedto function with the system.Note: It is possible to connect compatibledevices with a trailing USB lead as well asthose that plug into the vehicle USB socketdirectly (for example USB memory sticksand pen drives).Note: Some USB devices with a higherpower consumption may not be compatible(for example some larger hard drives).Note: Access time to read the files on theexternal device will vary depending uponfactors such as the file structure, size anddevice content.

The system supports a range of externaldevices, to fully integrate with your audiounit via the USB and auxiliary inputsockets. Once connected, control of theexternal device is possible via the audiounit.A list of typical compatible devices areshown below:• USB memory sticks• USB portable hard drives• Some MP3 players with USB

connection• iPod media players (refer to

www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for latestcompatibility list).

The system is USB 2.0 full speedcompatible, USB 1.1 host compliant andsupports FAT 16/32 file systems.

Information on audio filestructures for external devicesUSBCreate only a single partition on the USBdevice.If playlists are created, they must containcorrect file paths referenced to the USBdevice. It is recommended to create theplaylist after the audio files have beentransferred to the USB device.Playlists must be created in .m3u format.Audio files must be in .mp3 format.Do not exceed the following limits:• 1000 items per folder (files, folders and

playlists)• 5000 folders per USB device (including

playlists)• 8 subfolder levels.

297

Connectivity

To enable voice control for customplaylists and folders, follow the procedurebelow:• Create folders named with the

structure "Ford<*>" where <*> is anumber 1-10. For example "Ford3"without an extension.

• Create playlists named with thestructure "Ford<*>.m3u" where <*>is a number 1-10. For example"Ford5.m3u" without any spacebetween "Ford" and the number.

Thereafter, custom folders and playlistswill be selectable with voice control. SeeAudio unit commands (page 280).

iPodTo enable voice control for customplaylists, create playlists named with thestructure "Ford<*>" where <*> is anumber 1-10. For example "Ford7" withoutany space between "Ford" and thenumber.Thereafter, playlists will be selectable withvoice control. See Audio unit commands(page 280).

CONNECTING AN EXTERNALDEVICE

WARNINGMake sure the external device issecurely mounted within the vehicle,and that trailing connections do not

obstruct any of the driving controls.

External devices may be connected usingthe auxiliary input socket and the USB port.See Auxiliary Input Socket (page 131).See USB Port (page 131).

ConnectionPlug in the device, and if necessary secureit to prevent movement within the vehicle.

Connecting an iPodFor optimum convenience and audioquality, we recommend that you purchasea dedicated single connection leadavailable from your dealer.Alternatively, it is possible to connect youriPod using the standard iPod USB cableand a separate 3.5mm audio jack lead. Ifusing this method preset the iPod volumeto maximum and turn off any equalizersettings before making the connections:• Connect the headphone output of the

iPod to the AUX IN socket.• Connect the USB cable from the iPod

to the vehicle USB socket.

CONNECTING AN EXTERNALDEVICE - VEHICLES WITH:BLUETOOTHConnecting a Bluetooth audiodevice

CAUTIONAs various standards exist,manufacturers are able to implementa variety of profiles in their Bluetooth

devices. Because of this, an incompatibilitycan occur between the Bluetooth deviceand the system, which in some cases maylimit system functionality. To avoid thissituation, only recommended devicesshould be used.

Please visit the websitewww.ford-mobile-connectivity.comfor full details.

298

Connectivity

Bonding the deviceNote: Some audio and navigation unitshave a separate Bluetooth audio menu. Usethis to access setup and control.To connect the device to the system followthe same procedure as for Bluetooth handsfree phones. See Bluetooth setup (page273).

Operating the deviceSelect Bluetooth audio as the activesource.Tracks can be accessed by skippingforwards and backwards using the steeringwheel controls, or directly from the audiounit controls.

USING A USB DEVICEVarious icons are used to identify types ofaudio file, folders etc.

E100029

USB device is the active source

E100022

Folder

E100023

Playlist

E100024

Album

E100025

Artist

E100026

Filename

E100027

Track title

E100028

Information not available

Sony radioOperationSelect the USB device as the audio sourceby repeatedly pressing the CD/AUXbutton until USB appears in the display.After first connecting the USB device, thefirst track within the first folder will startto play automatically. Subsequently,following audio source switching, theposition of playback on the USB device isremembered.To browse the device contents, press theup/down arrow key or the OK button once.The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of

the display shows the current positionof the folder view.

• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example afolder named after an album, withindividual album tracks within thatfolder).

• "<" before the list indicates that afurther level up is readable.

• Icons to the left of track/folder textindicate the type of file/folder. Referto the list for an explanation of theseicons.

To navigate the USB device contents, usethe up/down arrow keys to scroll throughlists, and the left/right keys to move up ordown within the folder hierarchy. Once yourdesired track, playlist or folder ishighlighted, press the OK button to selectplayback.Note: If you wish to jump to the top levelof the USB device contents, press and holdthe left arrow key.

299

Connectivity

Audio controlPress the left and right arrow keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the left/right arrow keys toenable fast rewind/fast forward throughtrack content.Press the up/down arrow key or the OKbutton to browse the device contents.Press the MENU key to enter the USBmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here with respect tofolders and playlists.Press the SCAN button to scan the wholedevice, current folder or a playlist if it is inoperation.Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• filename• title• artist• album• track number and playing time.Repeated button presses will scrollthrough these displays.

CD Navigation unitsOperationSelect the USB device as the audio sourceby pressing the CD/AUX button untilDEVICES appears in the display. SelectDEVICES and then select USB from theavailable device list. After first connectingthe USB device, the first track within thefirst folder will start to play automatically.Subsequently, following audio sourceswitching, the position of playback on theUSB device is remembered.To browse the device contents, press theSELECT button once.

The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of



• "<" to the left hand side of the displayindicates that a further level up isreadable.


To navigate the USB device contents, usethe rotary scroll/select button to browsethrough lists. Push the button to expandthe contents within the highlighted playlistor folder, or to commence playback of aparticular track. Press ESC to go up onelevel.

Audio controlPress the SEEK up and down keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the SEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.Rotate or press the SELECT button tobrowse the device contents.Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons toenable shuffle and repeat functions withrespect to folders and playlists. Differentoptions may appear depending uponwhether or not a playlist is in operation.Press the SCAN button to scan the currentplaylist if it is in operation, or the completeUSB device or folder.

300

Connectivity

Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• filename• title• artist• album• track number and playing time.

SD Navigation unitsOperationSelect the USB device as the audio sourceby pressing the CD/AUX button until theUSB button appears to the left of thedisplay. Select USB from the availabledevice list.Note: Some devices may be shown but notselectable, depending if the device isconnected or not.After first connecting the USB device, thefirst track within the first folder will startto play automatically. Subsequently,following audio source switching, theposition of playback on the USB device isremembered.To browse the device contents, press thescroll up or down arrow button.The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of



• "<" to the left hand side of the displayindicates that a further level up isreadable.


To navigate the USB device contents, usethe scroll buttons to browse through lists.Push the button to expand the contentswithin the highlighted playlist or folder, orto commence playback of a particulartrack. Press the left arrow key to go up onelevel.

Audio controlPress the SEEK up and down keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the SEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browsethe device contents.Press SHUFFLE or REPEAT buttons toenable shuffle and repeat functions withrespect to folders and playlists.Press the SCAN button to scan the currentplaylist if it is in operation, or the completeUSB device or folder.Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• filename• title• artist• album• track number and playing time.

USING AN IPODVarious icons are used to identify types ofaudio file, folders etc.

301

Connectivity

E100030

iPod is the active source

E100031

iPod playlist

E100032

iPod artist

E100033

iPod album

E100034

iPod genre

E100035

iPod song

E100036

iPod generic category

E100037

iPod generic media file

Sony radioOperationConnect the iPod. See Connecting anexternal device (page 298).Select the iPod as the audio source byrepeatedly pressing the CD/AUX buttonuntil iPod appears in the display.The iPod menu list for browsing contentswill be available through the radio display.Navigation of the contents follows thesame principles as for iPod standalone use(for example search by artist, title, etc.).To browse the iPod contents, press theup/down arrow key or the OK button once.

The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of

the display shows the current positionof the list view.

• ">" after an entry indicates a furtherlevel down is readable (for example allalbums by a particular artist).


• An icon on the left side indicates thetype of the currently displayed list (forexample list of albums). Refer to thelist for an explanation of these icons.

To navigate the iPod contents, use theup/down arrow keys to scroll through lists,and the left/right keys to move up or downwithin the hierarchy. Once your desiredtrack, playlist, album, artist or genre ishighlighted, press the OK button to selectplayback.Note: If you wish to jump to the top levelof the iPod contents, press and hold the leftarrow key.

Audio controlPress the left and right arrow keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the left/right arrow keys toenable fast rewind/fast forward throughtrack content.Press the up/down arrow key or the OKbutton to browse the iPod contents.Press the MENU key to enter the iPodmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here. It is also possible toenable the iPod "Shuffle songs" optiondirectly from the top level.Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrently selected tracks.

302

Connectivity

Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• title• artist• track number and playing time.Repeated button presses will scrollthrough these displays.

CD Navigation unitsOperationConnect the iPod. See Connecting anexternal device (page 298).Select the iPod as the audio source bypressing the CD/AUX button untilDEVICES appears in the display. SelectDEVICES and then select iPod from theavailable device list.The iPod menu list for browsing contentswill be available through the display.Navigation of the contents follows thesame principles as for iPod standalone use(for example search by artist, title, etc.).To browse the iPod contents, press theSELECT button once.The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of





To navigate the iPod contents, use therotary scroll/select button to browsethrough lists. Push the button to expandthe contents within the highlighted playlist,album, artist, genre or to commenceplayback of a particular track. Press ESCto go up one level.

Audio controlPress the SEEK up and down keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the SEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.Rotate or press the SELECT button tobrowse the iPod contents.Press the MENU key to enter the iPodmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here. It is also possible toenable the iPod "Shuffle songs" optiondirectly from the top level.Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrently selected tracks.Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• title• artist• track number and playing time.

SD Navigation unitsOperationConnect the iPod. See Connecting anexternal device (page 298).Select the iPod as the audio source bypressing the CD/AUX button until the iPodbutton appears to the left of the display.Select iPod from the available device list.Note: Some devices may be shown but notselectable, depending if the device isconnected or not.

303

Connectivity

The iPod menu list for browsing contentswill be available through the display.Navigation of the contents follows thesame principles as for iPod standalone use(for example search by artist, title, etc.).To browse the iPod contents, press thescroll up or down arrow button.The display will show the trackinformation, together with other importantinformation described below:• A vertical scroll bar on the right side of





To navigate the iPod contents, use thescroll buttons to browse through lists. Pushthe button to expand the contents withinthe highlighted playlist, album, artist, genreor to commence playback of a particulartrack. Press the left arrow key to go up onelevel.

Audio controlPress the SEEK up and down keys to skipbackwards and forwards through tracks.Press and hold the SEEK keys to enablefast rewind/fast forward through trackcontent.Press the scroll bar arrow keys to browsethe iPod contents.Press the MENU key to enter the iPodmenu. It is possible to enable shuffle andrepeat functions here. It is also possible toenable the iPod "Shuffle songs" optiondirectly from the top level.

Press the SCAN button to scan thecurrently selected tracks.Press the INFO button to display thefollowing:• title• artist• track number and playing time.

304

Connectivity

TYPE APPROVALSFCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICEThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.FCC ID: WJLRX-42IC: 7847A-RX42Changes or modifications to your devicenot expressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance can void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.

RX-42 - declaration of conformityWe, the party responsible for compliance,declare under our sole responsibility thatthe Handset Integration product RX-42 isin conformity with the provisions of thefollowing Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. Acopy of the Declaration of Conformity canbe found at:

www.novero.com/declaration_of_conformityThe Bluetooth word mark and logos areowned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and anyuse of such marks by Ford Motor Companyis under license. Other trademarks andtrade names are those of their respectiveowners.

TYPE APPROVALSiPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.

TYPE APPROVALS

E114214

© 2008 NAVTEQ B.V. All rights reserved.

305

Appendices

E114220

TYPE APPROVALSEU DeclarationHereby, Valeo declares that this shortrange device is in compliance with theessential requirements and other relevantprovisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Certificate for United ArabEmirates

E125209

306

Appendices

ELECTROMAGNETICCOMPATIBILITY

WARNINGSYour vehicle has been tested andcertified to legislations relating toelectromagnetic compatibility

(72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 orother applicable local requirements). It isyour responsibility to ensure that anyequipment you have fitted complies withapplicable local legislations. Have anyequipment fitted by properly trainedtechnicians.

WARNINGSThe RF (radio frequency) transmitterequipment (e.g. cellular telephones,amateur radio transmitters etc.) may

only be fitted to your vehicle if they complywith the parameters shown in the tablebelow. There are no special provisions orconditions for installations or use.

Do not mount any transceiver,microphones, speakers, or any otheritem in the deployment path of the

airbag system.Do not fasten antenna cables tooriginal vehicle wiring, fuel pipes andbrake pipes.Keep antenna and power cables atleast 10 centimetres (4 inches) fromany electronic modules and airbags.

E85998

1 2 3 4

Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (PeakRMS)

Frequency BandMHz

3, 450 W1 – 30

1, 2, 350 W30 – 54

1, 2, 350 W68 – 87.5

307

Appendices

Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (PeakRMS)

Frequency BandMHz

1, 2, 350 W142 – 176

1, 2, 350 W380 – 512

1, 2, 310 W806 – 940

1, 2, 310 W1200 – 1400

1, 2, 310 W1710 – 1885

1, 2, 310 W1885 – 2025

Note: After the installation of RFtransmitters, check for disturbances fromand to all electrical equipment in thevehicle, both in the standby and transmitmodes.Check all electrical equipment:• with the ignition ON• with the engine running• during a road test at various speeds.Check that electromagnetic fieldsgenerated inside the vehicle cabin by thetransmitter installed do not exceedapplicable human exposure requirements.

308

Appendices

AA/C

See: Climate Control.........................................108About This Manual...........................................7ABS

See: Brakes...........................................................154ABS driving hints

See: Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes................................................................154

ACCSee: Adaptive cruise control (ACC).............167

AccessoriesSee: Replacement Parts

Recommendation..............................................7See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............168

Active suspension........................................159Principle of Operation.......................................159

Active suspensionSee: Using active suspension........................159

Adaptive cruise control (ACC).................167Principle of Operation.......................................167

Adaptive cruise control (ACC)See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control............168

Adaptive Headlamps....................................59Cornering lamps...................................................60

Adjusting the Headlamps - VehiclesWith: Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps....................................................58

Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................49AFS

See: Adaptive Headlamps................................59Air Conditioning

See: Climate Control.........................................108Air Vents..........................................................108

Front air vents......................................................108Rear air vents.......................................................108

Alarm..................................................................46Principle of Operation........................................46

Alternative frequencies.............................263All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................263Sony and Sony DAB..........................................263

Appendices....................................................305Arming the alarm...........................................48Arming the engine immobiliser................45Ashtray.............................................................128

Front ashtray........................................................128Rear ashtray..........................................................128

At a Glance.........................................................11Adjusting the steering wheel............................15Autolamps...............................................................16Automatic climate control................................18Automatic main beam control........................16Automatic transmission....................................20Autowipers...............................................................15Blind spot information system (BLIS)...........17Changing the wiper blades ...............................15Diesel particulate filter (DPF)..........................19Driver alert................................................................21Electric child safety locks...................................14Electric folding mirrors.........................................17Electric windows...................................................16Engine idle speed after starting.......................18Fuel filler flap..........................................................19Information displays.............................................17Instrument panel overview - left-hand

drive........................................................................11Instrument panel overview - right-hand

drive.......................................................................12Keyless entry...........................................................14Keyless starting......................................................18Lane departure warning.....................................21Manual climate control.......................................17Manual transmission..........................................20Rear view camera................................................20Reverse mirror dipping.........................................17Speed limiter...........................................................21Towing the vehicle on four wheels..................21

Audible Warnings and Indicators.............83Switching the chimes on and off...................83

Audio Control..................................................49Mode.........................................................................49Seek..........................................................................50

Audio distortion reduction (CLIP).........262All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................262Sony and Sony DAB..........................................262

Audio introduction......................................250Audio menu control....................................256

Sony CD and Sony CD DAB withBluetooth.........................................................258

Audio System Security..............................254Audio troubleshooting................................271Audio Troubleshooting................................271Audio Unit Clock and Date

Displays........................................................255

309

Index

Audio unit commands...............................280Auxiliary input.....................................................286CD Changer...........................................................281CD Player..............................................................280External devices - iPod....................................288External devices - USB....................................286Radio......................................................................283

Audio unit menus........................................262Audio unit operation...................................256Audio unit overview......................................251Auto-Dimming Mirror....................................75Autolamps........................................................56Automatic Climate Control.........................111

Air distribution.......................................................112Blower......................................................................112Mono mode............................................................112Recirculated air.....................................................113Setting the temperature....................................112Switching off the automatic climate

control.................................................................113Switching the air conditioning on and

off..........................................................................113To switch mono mode back on......................112To switch mono mode off................................112Windscreen defrosting and demisting........113

Automatic Main Beam Control.................56Activating the system.........................................57Manually overriding the system......................57Setting the system sensitivity..........................57

Automatic Transmission.............................151Drive modes..........................................................152Emergency park position release

lever.....................................................................152Hints on driving with an automatic

transmission....................................................152Selector lever positions.....................................151

Automatic volume control.......................262All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................262Sony and Sony DAB..........................................262

Autostore control........................................2586000CD................................................................259Sony CD.................................................................259

Autowipers.........................................................51

Auxiliary Heater..............................................114Changing the remote control battery...........117Diesel auxiliary heater (depending on

country)..............................................................118Feedback during starting and switching

off.........................................................................116Fuel operated heater (depending on

country)..............................................................117Parking heater.......................................................114Programming the transmitter.........................117Remote start in combination with direct

start or timer.....................................................116Remote starting...................................................116

Auxiliary input (AUX IN) socket..............270Auxiliary Input Socket..................................131Auxiliary Power Points................................128

BBalance/fade control.................................256

6000CD................................................................256Sony and Sony DAB..........................................256

Bass/treble control.....................................2566000CD................................................................256Sony and Sony DAB..........................................256

Battery connection points........................228Blind Spot Monitor.........................................76

Blind spot information system (BLIS).........76Detection errors.....................................................77System detection and alerts............................76Turning the system on and off.........................77Using the system..................................................76

Bluetooth setup............................................273Handling of phones...........................................273Requirements for Bluetooth

connection.......................................................273Bonnet Lock

See: Opening and Closing the Bonnet.......208Booster cables

See: Jump-Starting the Vehicle....................227Booster Seats..................................................23

Booster cushion (Group 3)...............................24Booster seat (Group 2)......................................23

Brake and Clutch Fluid Check..................221Brakes...............................................................154

Principle of Operation.......................................154Bulb changing

See: Changing a Bulb.........................................64

310

Index

Bulb Specification Chart.............................70

CCapacities and Specifications................246

Technical Specifications.................................246Cargo Nets......................................................183

Luggage retention net.......................................183Car Wash

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................225Catalytic Converter......................................144

Driving with a catalytic converter.................144CD changer.......................................................131Changing a Bulb.............................................64

Approach lamp.....................................................66Central high mounted brake lamp................68Daytime running lamps.....................................65Front fog lamps.....................................................67Headlamp...............................................................64Interior lamps........................................................68Luggage compartment lamp..........................70Number plate lamp.............................................68Reading lamps......................................................69Rear lamps..............................................................67Side repeater.........................................................66Vanity mirror lamp...............................................70

Changing a Fuse...........................................195Changing a Road Wheel...........................229

Assembling the wheel brace.........................232Installing a road wheel....................................234Jacking and lifting points................................230Locking wheel nuts...........................................229Removing a road wheel...................................233Removing the wheel trim................................232Vehicle jack..........................................................229Vehicles with a temporary spare

wheel.................................................................229Changing the remote control

battery.............................................................35Remote control with a folding key

blade....................................................................35Remote control without a folding key

blade....................................................................36Changing the Vehicle Battery.................228Changing the Wiper Blades........................53

Rear window wiper blades...............................53Windscreen wiper blades..................................53

Checking the Wiper Blades........................52

Child Safety......................................................22Child Safety Locks.........................................28

Electric child safety locks..................................29Manual child safety locks..................................28

Child Seat Positioning..................................24Child Seats........................................................22

Child restraints for different massgroups..................................................................22

Cigar Lighter....................................................127Cleaning the Exterior..................................225

Body paintwork preservation........................226Cleaning the alloy wheels...............................225Cleaning the chrome trim...............................225Cleaning the headlamps.................................225Cleaning the rear window...............................225

Cleaning the Interior...................................226Instrument cluster screens, LCD screens,

radio screens..................................................226Rear windows......................................................226Seat belts..............................................................226

Climate Control............................................108Principle of Operation......................................108

Climate control commands....................294Climate..................................................................294

Clock..................................................................127Coded keys.......................................................45Cold Weather Precautions........................192Compact disc playback............................266

Compact disc changer playback.................266Compact Disc Player..................................265Compact disc track compression..........267

All except Sony and Sony DAB.....................267Sony and Sony DAB..........................................267

Compact disc track scanning..................2676000CD................................................................267Sony and Sony DAB..........................................267

Connecting an external device...............298Connection..........................................................298

Connecting an external device - VehiclesWith: Bluetooth.........................................298Connecting a Bluetooth audio

device................................................................298Connectivity...................................................297

General Information..........................................297Convenience features..................................127Coolant Check

See: Engine Coolant Check............................220

311

Index

Cruise Control................................................165Principle of Operation.......................................165

Cruise controlSee: Using Cruise Control................................165

Cup Holders....................................................129

DDaytime Running Lamps............................56Diesel Particulate Filter..............................138

Regeneration........................................................138Digital signal processing (DSP).............262

Changing the DSP settings............................262DSP equaliser......................................................262DSP occupancy..................................................262

Direction Indicators........................................61Disabling the passenger airbag................33

Disabling the passenger airbag......................34Enabling the passenger airbag.......................34Fitting the passenger airbag deactivation

switch...................................................................33Disarming the alarm.....................................48

Vehicles with keyless entry..............................48Vehicles without keyless entry.......................48

Disarming the engine immobiliser...........45Dog Guard.......................................................184

Installing behind the front seats...................185Installing behind the rear seats.....................185

DPFSee: Diesel Particulate Filter..........................138

Driver Alert.......................................................175Principle of Operation.......................................175

Driving Hints...................................................192Driving Through Water................................192

Driving through water .......................................192DRL

See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................56

EEco Mode.........................................................142

Principle of Operation.......................................142Ejecting compact discs..............................267

6000CD................................................................268Sony CD................................................................268

Electric exterior mirrors................................74Electric folding mirrors........................................74Mirror tilting positions.........................................74Reverse mirror dipping........................................75

Electric sunroof..............................................118Opening and closing the sunroof..................119Opening and closing the sunroof

automatically...................................................119Sunroof anti-trap protection...........................119Sunroof relearning.............................................120Sunroof safety mode........................................120Tilting the sunroof...............................................119

Electromagnetic compatibility...............307Ending compact disc playback..............269Engine Block Heater....................................138Engine Coolant Check...............................220

Checking the coolant level.............................220Topping up.............................................................221

Engine immobiliser........................................45Principle of Operation........................................45

Engine Oil Check..........................................220Checking the oil level.......................................220Topping up...........................................................220

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratec-16VTi-VCT (Sigma)..........................................219

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L Duratorq-TDCi(DV) Diesel/2.0L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel/2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (DW)Diesel.............................................................220

Engine Oil Dipstick - 1.6L EcoBoost SCTi(Sigma).........................................................219

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L Duratec-HE(MI4)/2.3L Duratec-HE (MI4)..............219

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost SCTi(MI4)..............................................................219

Entering a security code............................2546000CD, Sony and Sony DAB......................254

Exterior Mirrors.................................................74Manual folding mirrors.......................................74

FFastening the seat belts...............................32Fast forward/reverse..................................266

All except Sony and Sony DAB....................266Sony and Sony DAB.........................................266

First Aid Kit......................................................193Floor Mats........................................................132

312

Index

Fog Lamps - FrontSee: Front Fog Lamps.........................................57

Fog Lamps - RearSee: Rear Fog Lamps..........................................58

Forward alert function................................172Adjusting the warning sensitivity..................172Switching the system on and off..................172

Front Fog Lamps.............................................57Fuel and Refuelling......................................143

Technical Specifications..................................146Fuel Burning Heater

See: Auxiliary Heater..........................................114Fuel Consumption.......................................146Fuel Consumption

See: Technical Specifications........................146Fuel filler flap.................................................144

Refuelling with a fuel can................................146Fuel Quality - Diesel....................................143

Long-term storage.............................................144Fuel Quality - E85.........................................143

Long-term storage.............................................143Fuel Quality - Petrol.....................................143Fuse Box Locations......................................194

Central fuse box..................................................194Engine compartment fuse box.....................194Rear fuse box - 4-door and 5-door.............194Rear fuse box - Estate......................................195

Fuses.................................................................194Fuse Specification Chart...........................196

Central fuse box................................................200Engine compartment fuse box.....................196Rear fuse box......................................................202

GGauges................................................................79

Engine coolant temperature gauge..............80Fuel gauge...............................................................81

GearboxSee: Transmission...............................................151

General Driving Points - Vehicles With:Sports Suspension....................................192

General Information on RadioFrequencies...................................................35

Glasses Holder................................................131Global Opening and Closing.....................40

Global closing.........................................................41Global opening.......................................................41

Glove Box.........................................................129Cooled glove box................................................129

HHandbrake

See: Parking Brake.............................................154Hazard Warning Flashers...........................60Headlamp adjustment

See: Adjusting the Headlamps - Vehicles With:Adaptive Front Lighting/XenonHeadlamps........................................................58

Headlamp Levelling......................................58Recommended headlamp levelling switch

positions.............................................................58Headlamp Washers.......................................52Head Restraints.............................................124

Adjusting the head restraint...........................124Removing the head restraint..........................124

Heated Seats..................................................125Raising and Lowering the

Temperature....................................................125Heated Windows and Mirrors...................113

Heated exterior mirrors......................................113Heated windows..................................................113

HeatingSee: Climate Control.........................................108

Hill launch assist (HLA)See: Using hill start assist...............................156

Hill Start Assist..............................................156Principle of Operation.......................................156

Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes............................................................154

HLASee: Hill Start Assist..........................................156See: Using hill start assist...............................156

IIgnition Switch...............................................133Immobiliser

See: Engine immobiliser....................................45Important audio information..................250

Audio unit labels................................................250Disc labels............................................................250

Incorrect security code..............................254Information Displays.....................................85

General Information............................................85

313

Index

Information Messages.................................98Active suspension................................................99Airbag.......................................................................99Alarm........................................................................99Automatic main beam control, Lane

departure warning and Driver alert..........99Battery and charging system........................100Blind spot monitor.............................................100Child power lock..................................................101Climate control....................................................101Cruise control and Adaptive cruise control

(ACC)..................................................................101Doors open............................................................101Engine immobiliser............................................102Hill start assist.....................................................102Keyless system....................................................102Lighting...................................................................103Maintenance........................................................104Message indicator...............................................98Message symbols................................................98Occupant protection........................................104Parking brake.......................................................104Power steering....................................................104Stability control (ESP).....................................105Start-stop.............................................................105Transmission........................................................105Tyre pressure monitoring system.................106Viewing current messages...............................98Voice control.........................................................107

Instrument Cluster.........................................79Instrument Lighting Dimmer....................127Interior Lamps..................................................61

Courtesy lamp........................................................61LED Interior lighting..............................................61Reading lamps.......................................................61Vanity mirror lamps.............................................63

Introduction.........................................................7iPod connection

See: Connecting an external device...........298See: Connecting an external device - Vehicles

With: Bluetooth.............................................298iPod

See: Using an iPod.............................................301ISOFIX Anchor Points....................................27

Attaching a child seat with top tethers........27Top tether anchor points...................................27

JJump starting

See: Jump-Starting the Vehicle....................227Jump-Starting the Vehicle........................227

To connect the booster cables......................227To start the engine............................................228

KKeyless Entry.....................................................41

Disabled keys.........................................................43General information.............................................41Locking and unlocking the doors with the

key blade............................................................44Locking the vehicle..............................................42Passive key..............................................................42Unlocking the vehicle..........................................43

Keyless Starting.............................................133Failure to start......................................................134Ignition on..............................................................133Starting a diesel engine....................................134Starting with automatic

transmission....................................................134Starting with manual transmission.............134Stopping the engine when the vehicle is

moving...............................................................135Stopping the engine with the vehicle

stationary..........................................................135Keys and Remote Controls.........................35

LLane Departure Warning............................177

Principle of Operation........................................177Lighting Control..............................................55

Headlamp flasher................................................55Home safe lighting...............................................55Lighting control positions.................................55Main and dipped beam......................................55Parking lamps........................................................55

Lighting..............................................................55Load Carriers

See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............184Load Carrying.................................................179

General Information...........................................179Loading compact discs.............................265

6000CD, Sony and Sony DAB......................265

314

Index

Loading the compact discchanger.........................................................265

Load Retaining Fixtures.............................186Installing the load bracket...............................187Installing the load retaining fixtures...........186

Locking and Unlocking.................................38Automatic relocking...........................................40Central locking......................................................38Double locking.......................................................38Double locking the doors with the key.........38Locking and unlocking confirmation............38Locking and unlocking the doors and the

luggage compartment lid with theremote control.................................................39

Locking and unlocking the doors frominside....................................................................39

Locking and unlocking the doors with thekey.........................................................................38

Luggage compartment lid................................40Reprogramming the unlocking

function..............................................................40Locks...................................................................38Lost security code.......................................254Luggage Anchor Points...............................179

4-door and 5-door.............................................180Estate......................................................................179

Luggage Covers.............................................182Stowing the luggage cover - Estate without

full size spare wheel.....................................183

MMaintenance.................................................208

General Information.........................................208Technical Specifications.................................222

Manual Climate Control............................109Air conditioning....................................................110Air distribution control.....................................109Blower....................................................................109Heating the interior quickly............................109Recirculated air...................................................109Ventilation..............................................................110

Manual Seats..................................................121Adjusting the angle of the seatback............122Adjusting the height of the driver’s

seat......................................................................122Adjusting the lumbar support........................122Moving the seats backwards and

forwards.............................................................121Manual Transmission...................................151Map Pockets..................................................130Memory Function.........................................130

Recalling a stored seat position.....................131Resetting the memory.......................................131Setting a memory pre-set...............................130

Message CentreSee: Information Displays.................................85

MirrorsSee: Heated Windows and Mirrors................113See: Windows and Mirrors.................................72

MP3 connectionSee: Connecting an external device...........298See: Connecting an external device - Vehicles

With: Bluetooth.............................................298MP3 display options...................................269

CD text display options...................................269MP3 file playback........................................268

6000CD................................................................268Playing a multi session disc..........................268Sony and Sony DAB.........................................268

NNavigation system commands..............294News broadcasts.........................................264

All except Sony and Sony DAB....................264Sony and Sony DAB..........................................264

OOccupant protection....................................30

Principle of Operation........................................30Oil Check

See: Engine Oil Check......................................220On/off control...............................................256Opening and Closing the Bonnet..........208

Closing the bonnet...........................................209Opening the bonnet.........................................208

315

Index

PParking Aid......................................................160

Manoeuvring with the parking aid...............160Switching the parking aid on and off.........160

Parking Aids...................................................160Principle of Operation......................................160

Parking Brake.................................................154Personalised Settings..................................96

Help screen, radio, navigation and phoneinformation........................................................96

Language.................................................................97Navigation information......................................96Units of measure..................................................97

Power Door LocksSee: Locking and Unlocking.............................38

Power Seats....................................................1222-way electric seat.............................................1228-way electric seat.............................................123

Power Steering Fluid Check......................221Topping up............................................................222

Power Windows..............................................72Anti-trap function.................................................73Driver’s door switches.........................................72Front and rear passengers’ door

switches..............................................................72Global opening and global closing................72Opening and closing the windows

automatically....................................................72Resetting the memory of the electric

windows..............................................................73Safety mode...........................................................73Safety switch for rear windows.......................72

Programming the remote control............35Programming a new remote control.............35Reprogramming the unlocking

function...............................................................35

RRear Fog Lamps.............................................58Rear Seats.......................................................124

Creating a level load floor................................124Folding the seatbacks down..........................124Folding the seatbacks up.................................125

Rear Under Floor Storage..........................182Vehicles with a sliding loadspace

floor.....................................................................182Vehicles without a sliding loadspace

floor.....................................................................182Rear view camera.........................................162

Principle of Operation.......................................162Rear View Camera........................................162

Activating the rear view camera...................162Deactivating the rear view camera..............164Using the display................................................162Vehicles with parking aid.................................164

Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........52Intermittent wipe..................................................52Reverse gear wipe................................................52Washer.....................................................................52

Refuelling - E85............................................146Refuelling........................................................146Regional mode (REG)................................263


Remote control batterySee: Changing the remote control

battery.................................................................35Remote control programming

See: Programming the remote control........35Removing a Headlamp................................63Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............226Repeat compact disc tracks...................268

6000CD................................................................268Sony and Sony DAB.........................................268

Replacement PartsRecommendation..........................................7Look for the Ford logo on the following

parts .......................................................................8Now you can be sure that your Ford parts

are Ford parts.......................................................7Roadside Emergencies...............................193Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................184

Roof rack................................................................184Running-In.......................................................192

Brakes and clutch...............................................192Engine.....................................................................192Tyres........................................................................192

SSafety Precautions.......................................143

316

Index

Seat belt height adjustment......................32Seat belt reminder.........................................33

Deactivating the seat belt reminder..............33Seat belts

See: Fastening the seat belts...........................32Seat memory function

See: Memory Function.....................................130Seats...................................................................121Security code................................................254Setting the clock and date on the audio

unit.................................................................2556000CD................................................................255Sony and Sony DAB..........................................255

Shuffle/random...........................................2666000CD................................................................266Sony CD and Sony CD DAB............................267

Sitting in the Correct Position...................121Sliding Loadspace Floor............................180

Storage compartment.......................................181Snow Chains

See: Using Snow Chains.................................239Speed Control

See: Cruise Control............................................165Speed Limiter.................................................173

Principle of Operation.......................................173Stability Control............................................155

Principle of Operation.......................................155Starter Switch

See: Ignition Switch...........................................133Starting a Diesel Engine.............................137

Cold or hot engine...............................................137Starting and Stopping the Engine..........133

General Information..........................................133Starting a Petrol Engine - E85..................137

Starting at low ambient temperatures...............................................................................137

Starting a Petrol Engine.............................136Cold or hot engine..............................................136Engine idle speed after starting....................136Flooded engine....................................................136

Start-Stop.......................................................140Principle of Operation......................................140

Station preset buttons..............................258Station tuning control...............................260

DAB service linking...........................................260Manual tuning......................................................261Scan tuning...........................................................261Seek tuning..........................................................260

Steering Wheel Lock...................................135Vehicles with keyless starting........................135Vehicles without keyless starting.................135

Steering Wheel...............................................49Storage compartments..............................129Sunroof

See: Electric sunroof..........................................118Sun Shades.....................................................127Switching Off the Engine...........................138

Vehicles with a turbocharger.........................138Symbols Glossary.............................................7

Symbols in this handbook...................................7Symbols on your vehicle.......................................7

TTechnical Specifications

See: Capacities and Specifications............246Telephone commands..............................289

Create a phonebook.........................................292Main settings.......................................................293Phone.....................................................................289Phone functions................................................290

Telephone controls......................................273Remote control...................................................273

Telephone setup...........................................272Bond another Bluetooth phone....................273Making a phone an active phone.................272Phonebook...........................................................272Phonebook categories.....................................272

Telephone.......................................................272General Information..........................................272

TelephoneSee: Using the telephone - Vehicles With:

Navigation System.......................................276See: Using the telephone - Vehicles Without:

Navigation System........................................274Temporary Mobility Kit..............................234

Checking the tyre pressure.............................237General information..........................................235Inflating the tyre.................................................236Using the tyre repair kit....................................235

317

Index

Tow Ball...........................................................188Driving with a trailer..........................................190Driving without a trailer.....................................191Inserting the tow ball arm...............................189Maintenance.........................................................191Removing the tow ball arm............................190Unlocking the tow ball arm

mechanism......................................................189Towing a Trailer.............................................188

Steep gradients...................................................188Towing Points...............................................206

Installing the towing eye................................206Towing eye location..........................................206

Towing the Vehicle on FourWheels.........................................................206All vehicles...........................................................206Vehicles with automatic

transmission...................................................207Towing..............................................................188Track selection..............................................265


Traffic information control.......................259Activating traffic announcements..............259Ending traffic announcements....................260Local or distant traffic.....................................259To adjust the preset volume.........................260Traffic announcement volume....................260

Transmission...................................................151Trip Computer.................................................94

Average fuel consumption...............................94Average speed.......................................................94Distance to empty...............................................94Odometer...............................................................94Outside air temperature....................................94Tripmeter.................................................................94Type 1 and 2............................................................95Type 3.......................................................................95

Type approvals.............................................305Certificate for United Arab Emirates..........306EU Declaration...................................................306FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE.............305RX-42 - declaration of conformity.............305

Tyre Care.........................................................238Tyre Pressure Monitoring System..........239

Checking the tyre pressures..........................240Setting the vehicle load..................................240

Tyre PressuresSee: Technical Specifications.......................240

Tyre Repair KitSee: Temporary Mobility Kit...........................234

TyresSee: Wheels and Tyres....................................229

UUnder Bonnet Overview - 1.6L

Duratec-16V Ti-VCT (Sigma)...............210Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L

Duratorq-TDCi (DV) Diesel....................215Under Bonnet Overview - 1.6L EcoBoost

SCTi (Sigma)................................................211Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L

Duratec-HE (MI4)......................................212Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L

Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel..................216Under Bonnet Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost

SCTi (MI4)....................................................213Under Bonnet Overview - 2.2L

Duratorq-TDCi (DW) Diesel..................218Under Bonnet Overview - 2.3L

Duratec-HE (MI4)......................................214Unloading the compact disc

changer........................................................266USB Port............................................................131USB

See: Using a USB device.................................299Using active suspension............................159

Selecting a setting.............................................159System malfunction..........................................159

Using Adaptive Cruise Control................168Automatic deactivation.....................................171Changing the set speed...................................169Setting a speed...................................................169Setting the vehicle gap.....................................170Switching the system off..................................171Switching the system on.................................169Temporarily deactivating the system...........171

Using an iPod.................................................301CD Navigation units..........................................303SD Navigation units..........................................303Sony radio............................................................302

318

Index

Using a USB device....................................299CD Navigation units.........................................300SD Navigation units...........................................301Sony radio............................................................299

Using Cruise Control....................................165Cancelling the set speed.................................165Changing the set speed...................................165Resuming the set speed..................................166Setting a speed...................................................165Switching cruise control off...........................166Switching cruise control on............................165

Using driver alert...........................................175Resetting the system.........................................176Switching the system on and off..................175System display.....................................................176System warnings.................................................175

Using Eco mode............................................142Resetting Eco mode..........................................142

Using hill start assist...................................156Activating the system........................................157Deactivating the system..................................158

Using lane departure warning..................177Setting the steering wheel vibration

level.....................................................................178Setting the system sensitivity........................178Switching the system on and off...................177System warnings.................................................178

Using seat belts during pregnancy..........33Using Snow Chains.....................................239

Vehicles with stability control (ESP).........239Using Stability Control................................155

Vehicles without stability control (ESP)switch.................................................................155

Vehicles with stability control (ESP)switch.................................................................155

Using start-stop...........................................140To re-start the engine........................................141To stop the engine.............................................140

Using the speed limiter...............................173Intentionally exceeding the speed

limit......................................................................173Setting the speed limit......................................173System warnings.................................................174

Using the telephone - Vehicles With:Navigation System...................................276Changing the active phone.............................277Debonding a bonded phone..........................278Making a call.........................................................277Muting the microphone....................................277Receiving an incoming call..............................277Receiving a second incoming call................277

Using the telephone - Vehicles Without:Navigation System....................................274Changing the active phone............................276Debonding a bonded phone..........................276Debonding a bonded phone - Sony

radio...................................................................276Making a call........................................................274Muting the microphone...................................275Receiving an incoming call.............................275Receiving a second incoming call................275

Using voice control......................................279Name tag..............................................................280System operation...............................................279

Using Winter Tyres......................................238

VVehicle battery..............................................227Vehicle Care...................................................225Vehicle Identification Number................245Vehicle Identification Plate......................244Vehicle identification..................................244Vehicle recovery...........................................206Ventilated Seats............................................126

Raising and Lowering theTemperature....................................................126

VentilationSee: Climate Control.........................................108

VentsSee: Air Vents.......................................................108

VINSee: Vehicle Identification Number............245

Voice control..................................................279Principle of Operation......................................279

319

Index

WWarning Lamps and Indicators..................81

ABS warning lamp................................................81Airbag warning lamp...........................................81Blind spot monitor indicator.............................81Brake system lamp...............................................81Coolant temperature warning lamp..............81Direction indicators..............................................82Engine warning lamp..........................................82Forward alert indicator.......................................82Front fog lamp indicator....................................82Frost warning lamp.............................................82Glow plug indicator.............................................82Headlamp indicator............................................82Ignition warning lamp.........................................82Lane departure warning indicator.................82Low fuel level warning lamp............................83Main beam indicator...........................................83Message indicator................................................83Oil pressure warning lamp................................83Rear fog lamp indicator.....................................83Seat belt reminder...............................................83Shift indicator........................................................83Stability control (ESP) warning lamp..........83Start-stop indicator.............................................83

Warning Triangle...........................................1934-door and 5-door.............................................193Estate and vehicles with tyre repair

kit.........................................................................193Washer Fluid Check.....................................222Washers

See: Wipers and Washers..................................51Washing

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................225Waveband button.......................................258Wheels and Tyres........................................229

General Information.........................................229Technical Specifications.................................240

Windows and Mirrors....................................72Windscreen Washers....................................52Windscreen Wipers........................................51

Intermittent wipe...................................................51Winter Tyres

See: Using Winter Tyres..................................238Wipers and Washers......................................51

320

Index

CG3536en

FORD MONDEO Owner's Manual - Free Ford Radio Code · FORD MONDEO Owner's Manual. The information...

Documents

Transcript of FORD MONDEO Owner's Manual - Free Ford Radio Code · FORD MONDEO Owner's Manual. The information...